JP7141135B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (also referred to as a "pachinko game machine" or "pachinko machine").

In a general pachinko machine, a game ball is launched into a game area, and when the ball enters a starting hole provided in the game area, a lottery (special lottery) is made to determine whether or not to generate a big win that is advantageous to the player. I do. Then, the variable display of the special pattern is performed based on the lottery result of the special lottery, and the variable display using the decorative pattern is also performed in the performance display device, so that the result of the special lottery can be easily recognized by the player. (Whether or not you have won the jackpot) is shown.

In addition, until the result of the special lottery is shown, the performance display device not only performs variable display using decorative symbols, but also executes various display performances to heighten the player's sense of expectation. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses an effect (dialogue announcement) in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the content of the lines displayed on the effect display device.

JP 2013-141587 A

By the way, the effect of displaying images, character strings, etc. on the effect display device has a great influence on the interest of the player. There is a demand for more diverse presentations.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a new effect that enhances the player's interest.

In order to solve such a problem, in the present invention, a win-or-lose determination is made based on information obtained by establishment of a predetermined starting condition, a special symbol is variably displayed based on the result of the determination, and the variable display is performed. A game machine performing a special game advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a result, comprising a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to the progress of the game by the main control means. , a display device capable of displaying the performance, and a performance input device capable of input operation by the player. a first character effect in which a first character string is displayed on the display device; and a second character effect in which a second character string is displayed on the display device at a specific timing later than the predetermined timing in the predetermined game period. A character effect and an operation request effect requesting the player to perform an input operation of the effect input device are included, and the operation request effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns with different expectations for game results or game development. During the same fluctuation of the special symbols, the operation request effect is more likely to be displayed when the second character effect is displayed than when the first character effect is displayed, and the special symbol is displayed. The operation request effect displayed after the second character effect is displayed during the same variation is more than the operation request effect displayed after the first character effect is displayed during the same variation of the special symbol. , a specific effect pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to be selected, and when a first error occurs, a first error character string, which is a notification character string related to the first error, is displayed. A first error notification effect and a second error notification effect of displaying a second error character string, which is a notification character string related to the second error when a second error different from the first error occurs, can be executed. and when the first error character string is displayed by executing the first error notification effect, the first error character string and the first character string in the first character effect are superimposed. While being able to display the first error character string and the second character string in the second character effect simultaneously without being superimposed, the second error notification effect is executed. , the second error character string is not displayed simultaneously with the first character string in the first character effect, and the second error character string in the second character effect is not displayed at the same time. 2 are not displayed at the same time, and when executing the first character effect or the second character effect, voice output corresponding to the characters related to the first character string or the second character string may be accompanied. The first error notification effect is executed when the first character effect or the second character effect accompanied by the voice output corresponding to the characters related to the first character string or the second character string is executed. Provided is a gaming machine characterized in that, even when the .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a new effect that enhances the player's interest.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine in which the glass frame is released from the front frame and the front frame is released from the outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view from the front of a pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is a rear view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back surface of the game board from the left back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back surface of the game board from the right back. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a rear view (part 1) of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view (2) of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view (part 3) of a pachinko machine. 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state of FIG. 17; FIG. It is a control block diagram showing an electrical configuration example of the gaming machine. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of functions of the main control board shown in FIG. 19; FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of functions of the effect control board shown in FIG. 19; It is a figure which shows an example of a special design success or failure lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the design table per special design. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the special design variation pattern table for loss. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination table. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing on the main control side; FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control-side main process following FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a main control-side main process following FIG. 28; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing continuing from FIG. 32 ; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a starting port monitoring control process; FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting port monitoring control process continued from FIG. 34; FIG. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol variation start monitoring control process. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol variation start monitoring process shown in FIG. 36; FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation start monitoring processing following FIG. 37 ; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special design control general purpose processing shown in FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 40; FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during special symbol variation shown in FIG. 40. FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during special symbol stop symbol display shown in FIG. 40. FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of a process during special symbol stop symbol display following FIG. 43 ; FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during special symbol stop symbol display following FIG. 44 ; FIG. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special electric accessary product control process. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a special electric accessary product control process following FIG. 46; FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of a special electric accessary product control process following FIG. 47 ; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of reset start processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control side main processing. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing shown in FIG. 50; FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of effect state transition processing shown in FIG. 51; FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a variable effect content determination process shown in FIG. 51; FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a big hit effect content determination process shown in FIG. 51. FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of a big hit effect content determination process following FIG. 54 ; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control side timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of image control command transmission interrupt processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining display of decorative patterns and the like on the effect display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a relationship between a character that can appear in an effect and a suggestion expectation level; It is a figure which shows the example of a screen transition before a demonstration production|presentation start. It is a figure which shows the screen transition in the 1st example of demonstration production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the screen transition in the example of the 2nd production|presentation of demonstration production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing screen transition in the first example of dialogue production; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing screen transition in a second example of dialogue production; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing screen transitions in a third example of dialogue production; It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a maker pattern. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining first to third patterns of line development; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a fourth pattern and a fifth pattern of line development; It is a figure which shows the screen transition example of telop production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of an effect in which a dialogue effect and a telop effect appear; It is a figure which shows the screen transition example of the production|presentation which combined the telop production|presentation and the SP ready-to-win production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of an effect in which a dialogue effect and a symbol pseudo-stop effect are combined; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of error output setting according to the type of error; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of effects in which look-ahead effects and character effects are combined;

A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Pachinko machine structure>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 2 and subsequent drawings show the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from the other direction and disassembled. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine with the glass frame opened from the front frame and the front frame opened from the outer frame, and FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view from the front of the pachinko machine disassembled into a frame and an outer frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view from the rear of the pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame and an outer frame. is.

A pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility of a game hall, a glass frame (door frame) 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and supporting the glass frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. A game board having a front frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a game area 5a attached detachably to the front frame 4 from the front, viewed through the glass frame 3, and into which game balls are hit. 5 and .

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular shape combining frames 2a and 2b extending vertically and horizontally and frames 2c and 2d extending vertically on the left and right. The hinge member supports the front frame 4 and the glass frame 3 so that they can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached.

A glass frame 3 is attached to the front side of the front frame 4 so as to be laterally openable and detachable by means of hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b on the left edge as viewed from the front. The glass pane 3 is held closed by a glass plate covering its front side using a locking device 3c. A game board 5 is detachably attached from the front side of the front frame 4 to the upper half of the front frame 4 located behind the glass frame 3, and the multiple glass frames 3 closed and held as described above. A game area 5a in front of the game board 5 is visible through the layered glass.

The glass frame 3 includes a rectangular base unit 3e having a through hole 3d penetrating back and forth, a plate unit 3f for storing game balls below the front surface of the base unit 3e, and a game board 5 for storing game balls stored in the plate unit 3f. and an area 3g for accommodating a handle 4a that can be operated by the player for striking into the playing area. A frame lamp (LED lamp) 3h that emits light according to the progress of the game and a speaker 3i that outputs sound according to the progress of the game are provided on the front side of the glass frame 3. At the front center of the dish unit 3f, a performance button 3j to be pressed by the player is provided. The base of the effect button 3j has a lever structure that can be tilted forward (toward the player) up to a predetermined angle, and functions as a second effect button 3k that is operated by the player. In addition, the second effect button 3k may have a structure that allows the pulling operation to be performed at all times. It is preferable that the lock is released to enable the pulling operation (ON operation).

The front frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and includes a frame 4b that supports the outer periphery of the game board 5; hinges 4c and 4d rotatably attached to the hinges, a ball launching device 4e attached to the front lower portion of the frame 4b for hitting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the frame A locking unit 4f that is attached to the right side of the frame 4b in front view and locks between the outer frame 2, the front frame 4, and the glass frame 3, and a substrate unit 4g that is attached to the lower rear surface of the frame 4b. and a rear cover 4h covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame 4b on the rear side of the frame 4b. The board unit 4g accommodates a speaker unit, a power supply board, an interface control board, and a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the game ball shooting device 4a, the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force corresponding to the angle. When the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning openings (ball receiving openings), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the received winning openings. The player's interest can be heightened by the payout of the game balls.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 14. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 10 is a rear view of the game board, FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the back of the game board seen from the rear left, and FIG. Fig. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from above; FIG.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are hit. The game board 5 is configured by combining a front unit 100m, a rear unit 200m, a liquid crystal base 300m, and a liquid crystal display device (effect display device) 70. FIG. The front unit 100m includes a front member 100a that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a plate-like plate that is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A game panel 100b is provided, and a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 100b within the game area 5a.

The front member 100a has a function display unit 100c in the lower right corner that allows the player to visually recognize the game situation based on a control signal from the main control unit 5b (main control board 100 that controls the entire game). The liquid crystal display device 70 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a and displays a predetermined effect image. A peripheral control unit 5c (an effect control board 200 that controls the overall effect) is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 70 . The liquid crystal base 300m is open on the rear unit 200m side and accommodates the rear unit 200m.

The game panel 100b has substantially the same outer shape as the front member 100a, is composed of a transparent flat panel plate, is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a, and further has a holder to which the rear unit 200m is attached on the rear surface. The front member 100a has a plurality of general prize winning openings 66 which are always open to accept the game balls hit into the game area 5a, and the game balls can be received at positions different from the general winning openings in the game area 5a. A first starting port 61 that is always open, a gate 63 (integrally formed in an attacker unit 500 described later) that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passes through the gate. A second starting port 62 (integrally formed in the attacker unit 500 described later) that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the normal symbol lottery result drawn by passing through, and the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 61. A large winning opening 64 (to be described later integrally formed in the attacker unit 500). Note that the gate 63, the second starting port 62 and the big prize winning port 64 are located in the attacker unit 500, so they are not shown here.

The second starting port is provided with a normal electric accessory constituted by a movable piece and a normal electric accessory solenoid for opening and closing the normal electric accessory. Depending on the energized state of the solenoid of the ordinary electric accessory, the ordinary electric accessory is divided into a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second starting port and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. are alternately variable. The second starting port has a configuration in which a game ball is difficult to enter unless the normal electric accessory is in an open state, while a game ball is easy to enter when the normal electric accessory is in an open state. The front member 100a has a first out port 29 directly below the first starting port 61 in the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 500 is located on the lower right side of the front member 100a. The attacker unit 500 is a unit that mainly includes a movable piece as a special electric accessory 642 that opens and closes the big prize opening 64, and is integrated with a plurality of parts.

The rear unit 200m has an opening 200a for viewing the rear liquid crystal display screen. The back unit 200m includes a sensor for detecting game balls received in the general winning port 66, the first starting port 61, etc., a lock mechanism for detachably attaching the liquid crystal base 300m, and a path for ejecting game balls. Prepare.

The front member 100a has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front member 100a has an outer rail 100f extending in an arc from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the circumferential direction clockwise along the circumferential direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extending obliquely upward to the right. 100f, the inner rail 100d is arranged inside the front member 100a and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front; and an out guideway 100e that is formed at the lowest position and slopes downward toward the rear.

The game panel 100b includes a center decoration 22 projecting toward the front member 100a around an opening having the same shape as the opening of the front member 100a. When the game panel 100b is fixed to the front member 100a, the center decoration 22 fits into the opening of the front member 100a so as to match the shape of the opening, and decorates the opening 100h of the front unit 100m. The player can recognize the effect screen and the behavior of the effect device through the opening 100h. The center decoration 22 is a kind of decoration, and exhibits a decoration function of assisting the screen of the effect display device 70 at the center of the game board 5.例文帳に追加The center decoration 22 may be provided with a movable accessory (movable production device) that executes a production operation according to the progress of the game. A movable accessory is operated by a driving source such as a stepping motor or a solenoid. The center decoration 22 may be provided with a lamp that emits light according to the progress of the game.

The main control unit 5b (see FIG. 7) is mounted behind the liquid crystal display device 70 and below the peripheral control unit 5c. The main control unit 5b includes a main control board 100 for controlling game contents, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board case 100n for housing the main control board 100 (see FIG. 16). The main control unit 5b controls game contents, prize balls, and the like.

The function display unit 100c controls blinking of a state indicator consisting of one LED for displaying a game state, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal symbol lottery drawn by passing a game ball through a gate 63. After variably displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal symbol lottery result, and a normal symbol variable display related to the passage of the game ball to the gate 63, the condition for starting the variable display still A normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays that are not established, and the first lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 61 (occurrence of starting winning) a first special symbol display device for controlling blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the special lottery to variably display the first special symbol and then displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery; The second consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display is not satisfied yet, among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 61 The second special symbol is displayed by blinking eight LEDs based on the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the second start port (occurrence of start winning prize) and the special holding number indicator. A second special symbol display device that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result after the variable display, and a variable display of the second special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port. A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the holding number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is " A round indicator consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening is provided at the time of a "jackpot" or the like. The function display unit 100c can display the pending number, patterns, etc. by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc., the LED as appropriate.

The peripheral control unit 5c is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 70, and controls effects (luminous effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc.) presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 100. It has a board 200 and an image control board 300 for controlling image display and sound output according to game development (see FIG. 19). The liquid crystal display device 70 is located in the center of the game area 5a, and is detachably attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal base 300m, which accommodates the back unit 200m, substantially in the center. The liquid crystal display device 70 can be visually recognized from the front surface through the frame of the frame-like center decoration 22 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The liquid crystal display device 70 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and displays still images and moving images. In this embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 are described as being configured by dividing them into two boards, but the functional configuration of the CPU of each board is not limited to that described above, It may be changed as appropriate (for example, sound control may be performed by the CPU on the production control board), or all the production may be controlled by the CPU on one board.

The liquid crystal display device 70 mainly displays decorative patterns that change and stop in conjunction with the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and effects images including advance notice effects. Hold display. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative pattern display unit in which variable display of decorative patterns, advance notice effect display, etc. are executed, and the first special pattern is reserved in synchronization with the first special pattern reservation lamp. There are provided a first special figure reservation display section in which display is performed and a second special figure reservation display section in which reservation display of the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the second special figure reservation lamp.

In the decorative pattern display portion of the liquid crystal display screen, three columns of display regions (left display region, middle display region, right display region) are provided as variable display regions of decorative patterns on a predetermined effective line, The left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left display region, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle display region, and the right pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right display region are stopped and displayed. In the special figure reservation display part, in the normal display mode, when the operation reservation ball of the special pattern occurs, the reservation image of the white circle mark is displayed, and when the operation reservation ball is digested, the corresponding reservation image disappears. be. This reserved image is displayed in a predetermined order, such as the type and order of occurrence (order of entry) of the operation reserved ball of the special symbol, and it is possible to display up to 4 each in each special figure reserved display part. be.

<Change settings>
It is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can have a setting change function that changes the degree of advantage for the player in the game by setting values in multiple stages. Here, the set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player in the game, and is managed by the main control board 100 (see FIG. 19). In this example, it is assumed that six levels of setting values are prepared, namely, "Setting 1", "Setting 2", . In order to make the degree of advantage for the player of the game different depending on each set value, for example, it is conceivable to make a difference in the big hit probability of the special symbol lottery for each set value. The main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the setting value, and when the setting value is changed by a setting change operation described later, the main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the changed setting value.

Therefore, the features of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment when the setting change function is provided will be described in detail below. In the following description, changing/setting a setting value is referred to as "setting change", and a series of operations related to setting change is referred to as "setting change operation".

In the setting change operation in the pachinko machine 1, first, an operation is performed to shift the internal state controlled by the main control board 100 (main control CPU 101) to a "setting change state" in which the setting value can be changed, and then , by performing an operation of selecting and setting a desired set value (a known operation method in a conventional game machine can be used, and detailed description thereof will be omitted) while being controlled in the setting change state. , the setting value can be changed.

The operation for shifting to the setting change state includes a first procedure of opening the front frame 4 (frame open) and a second procedure of turning on the setting key switch (setting key switch on). , a third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) for performing an initialization operation on the initialization switch, and a fourth procedure (power switch ON) for performing a power ON operation on the power switch. However, the third and fourth procedures must be operated in parallel.

These first to fourth procedures will be described in detail with reference to the characteristic structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

In the first procedure (frame opening), an operation of opening the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 using the door key is performed. A door key is also called a common key, and in general, a key that can be shared with other types of gaming machines is used so as to facilitate operation at the gaming arcade, rather than being unique to each manufacturer or model of the gaming machine.

To describe the procedure for opening the frame in more detail, for example, a door key is inserted into a keyhole (not shown) of a locking device that holds the front frame 4 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2, and the front frame 4 is moved forward while being rotated in a predetermined direction. The front frame 4 can be released from the outer frame 2 by pulling. The keyhole into which the door key is inserted to release the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 may share the keyhole of the locking device 3c that keeps the glass frame 3 closed with respect to the front frame 4.

In the pachinko machine 1, a door opening sensor 2p is provided on the curtain plate portion of the outer frame 2 in order to detect the opening/closing state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and furthermore, the door opening sensor 2p of the front frame 4 corresponds to the door opening sensor 2p. A door open detection member 4p is provided at the position. For example, when the front frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door opening detection member 4p is fitted into the door opening sensor 2p, so that the door opening sensor 2p indicates the closed state of the front frame 4 (door closed). On the other hand, when the front frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the door opening detection member 4p moves away from the door opening sensor 2p, and the door opening sensor 2p detects the open state of the front frame 4 (door open). to detect. Information detected by the door opening sensor 2p is output to a predetermined board or the like, and processed as an error as necessary. The structure described above is an example of a mechanism for detecting the opening/closing state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and may be realized by other known mechanisms.

FIG. 15 is a rear view (part 1) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 before the frame is opened. If the outer frame 2 is removed from FIG. corresponds to the rear view of the front frame 4 of FIG. According to FIG. 15, on the back side of the front frame 4, the back cover 4h covering the back side of the game board 5 is closed. The back cover 4h is a covering member that normally covers the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (effect control board 200). Therefore, even if the first procedure of opening the front frame 4 is performed, these covered units cannot be touched as long as the back cover 4h is in the closed state.

In addition, FIG. 15 shows a RAM clear switch cover 400p provided on the payout control board 400 (payout control unit) to cover the RAM clear switch 400q and a power board 600 (power supply unit) to cover the power switch 600q. A power switch cover 600p is shown, the details of which will be described later.

Next, in the second procedure (setting key switch on), the setting key is used to turn on the setting key switch 100q. Unlike the door key described above, the setting key is a unique key for each game machine manufacturer (or model) from the viewpoint of security in order to prevent fraud related to "settings" that greatly affect the performance of the game machine. Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting key switch 100q is provided in the main control unit 5b (for example, the main control board 100). As described above with reference to FIG. 15, if the front frame 4 is simply released from the outer frame 2 in the first procedure, the main control unit 5b is covered with the rear cover 4h, so the setting key switch 100q is not activated. Can't insert setting key in Therefore, when performing the second procedure, it is necessary to open the back cover 4h.

FIG. 16 is a rear view (part 2) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 with the back cover 4h removed from FIG. 15. With the outer frame 2 removed from FIG. and the rear cover 4h is opened). According to FIG. 16, the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (effect control board 200) covered by the back cover 4h are exposed. However, the setting key switch 100q has not yet appeared in a visible position.

In this embodiment, the back surface of the main control unit 5b is covered with a main control board case 100n, and the portion where the setting key switch 100q is provided is usually covered with an openable and closable harness cover 100p. That is, the setting key switch 100q is normally double-covered by the back cover 4h and the harness cover 100p, and when performing the second procedure, it is necessary to open the harness cover 100p after opening the back cover 4h. There is In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the back cover 4h has a structure that opens and closes in the horizontal direction, whereas the harness cover 100p has a structure that opens and closes in the vertical direction. By making the opening and closing directions of both covers different in this way, it becomes difficult to operate the setting key switch 100q from a gap while the front frame 4 is slightly opened, and crime prevention can be enhanced.

FIG. 17 is a rear view (part 3) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 with the harness cover 100p opened from the state shown in FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state of FIG. 17. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the harness cover 100p is opened to the back side of the front frame 4, thereby exposing the setting key switch 100q provided at the back so that it can be operated.

Therefore, at this time, an operator (for example, a hall manager) who performs the setting change operation inserts the corresponding setting key into the setting key switch 100q from the back side of the front frame 4 while keeping the harness cover 100p open. A second procedure for turning on the setting key switch 100q can be executed by performing an operation such as turning it in the direction.

17 and 18 also show how the RAM clear switch cover 400p provided in the payout control unit and the power switch cover 600p provided in the power supply unit are opened.

The RAM clear switch cover 400p is a cover that swings vertically to open and close. For example, the RAM clear switch cover 400p has a locking mechanism in the closed state, and after the lock is released by once moving the RAM clear switch cover 400p downward, it can be opened forward. By opening the RAM clear switch cover 400p, the RAM clear switch 400q is exposed for operation.

The RAM clear switch 400q corresponds to the initialization switch operated in the third procedure, and a predetermined initialization operation (for example, an ON operation by pressing the RAM clear switch 400q within a predetermined period after power-on) is performed. When the main control RAM 103 is read, it outputs a signal for initializing (RAM clearing) the control information stored in the main control RAM 103 . The initialization operation for clearing the RAM is not limited to the single operation of the RAM clear switch 400q. may be initialized. Further, the range of information initialized when executing RAM clear is not limited to only the control information stored in the main control RAM 103 .

Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator performing the setting change operation performs an initialization operation (for example, ON operation), the third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) can be executed.

The power switch cover 600p is a cover that swings vertically to open and close, like the RAM clear switch cover 400p described above. The power switch cover 600p may also have a lock mechanism. By opening the power switch cover 600p, the power switch 600q is operably exposed.

The power switch 600q is a power switch that changes the power supply state in the gaming machine 1 (at least the main control board 100), and outputs a signal for switching the power ON/OFF state when the power operation is performed. .

Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator who performs the setting change operation performs a predetermined power operation (turning on the power) to the power switch 600q from the back side of the front frame 4 while the power switch cover 600p is open. operation), the fourth procedure (power switch on) can be executed. In addition, as described above, the third procedure and the fourth procedure must be operated simultaneously (in parallel). By performing the first to fourth procedures, the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the setting change state, and the setting value can be selected and set.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the first to fourth procedures for shifting to the setting change state, the first procedure (frame opening) and the second procedure (setting key switch ON) is omitted, it becomes an initialization operation, and when the third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) is omitted and executed, the current game setting (set value) is confirmed. Move to confirmation state.

As described above, in the setting change operation in the pachinko machine 1, the second to fourth procedures must be executed from the back side of the front frame 4 while the front frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 by the first procedure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of changing settings while the front door (front frame 4) of the game machine is closed.

<Control configuration of game machine>
FIG. 19 is a control block diagram showing an example of the control configuration of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 19, the main control board 100 includes a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, an I/O port circuit 104, and the like. The main control CPU 101 controls the operation of the main control program and executes various arithmetic processing related to games. The main control ROM 102 nonvolatilely stores the main control program and various data. The main control RAM 103 functions as a work area used as a temporary storage area (temporary area) and as a buffer memory. The I/O port circuit 104 inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards such as the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400 and each device under the control of the main control CPU 101 .

The main control CPU 101 reads the main control program from the main control ROM 102 and executes each command on the main control RAM 103, thereby controlling game operations according to each command of the main control program.

In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 includes a clock circuit, a WDT circuit, a CTC circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like.

The clock circuit divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock. When the main control CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control, the WDT circuit is reset to return to a normal state. The CTC circuit generates real-time interrupts and measures time. The random number generation circuit operates as a separate system from the program processing (software random number) by the main control CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (internal random number). These are electrically connected to each other via an internal bus (not shown).

The main control CPU 101 reads the main control program stored in the main control ROM 102 based on the detection information from each switch 161, etc., and executes arithmetic processing, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game.

Furthermore, the main control CPU 101, in addition to the production command output port for outputting the production control command for executing the production operation accompanying the main control of the game to the production control board 200, also executes the game ball payout operation. and a strobe signal output port for outputting a strobe signal for determining the timing at which the target board receives each of the transmission commands. . The main control CPU 101 has various other output ports, and the strobe signal output port 101B actually exists as a port for outputting a plurality of data together with other output data.

The main control RAM 103 is a volatile storage means at least a part of which is backed up by backup power generated in the power supply board 600 . The backup area of the main control RAM 103 is an area in which data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of power interruption should be retained in the event of a power interruption (hereinafter referred to as "power interruption"). When the power is turned on (when the power is turned off), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

The main control board 100 includes a setting key switch 100q for changing set values, a first starter switch 161 provided at the first starter port 61, a second starter switch 162 provided at the second starter port 62, It is electrically connected to various switches such as an operation gate switch 163 provided in the gate 63, a large winning opening switch 164 provided in the large winning opening 64, and a general winning opening switch 166 provided in the general winning opening 66. ing. In the main control board 100 , detection signals from these various switches are input to the main control CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104 .

Furthermore, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 171, a second special symbol display device 172, a first special symbol retention lamp 173, a second special symbol retention lamp 174, a normal symbol display device 175, and a general symbol retention lamp. It is electrically connected to various display means such as 176 . The main control board 100 is electrically connected to various solenoids such as a normal electric accessory solenoid 123 that operates the normal electric accessory 622 and a special electric accessory solenoid 124 that operates the special electric accessory 642. , a control signal from the main control CPU 101 is transmitted to these various display means and various solenoids through the I/O port circuit 104 .

Between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200, for example, it is connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe signal line, and a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 Communication is possible only with That is, while it is allowed to transmit various effect control commands from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, it is not permitted to transmit commands and data from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100. .

The I/O port circuit 104 is provided between the main control CPU 101 and the effect control board connector 109 on the main control board 100 . The main control CPU 101 and the effect control board connector 109 are connected by a strobe signal bus 112 composed of strobe signal lines in addition to the data bus 111 composed of eight data lines. The command data transmitted from the I/O port circuit 104 is received by the effect control board 200 via the effect control board connector 109 under the control of the main control CPU 101 as will be described later.

<Production control board>
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the performance control board 200 stores a performance control CPU 201 that executes various arithmetic processing related to game performance based on the performance control command from the main control board 100, a performance control program, various data, and the like. Effect control ROM 202, effect control RAM 203 that functions as a work area and buffer memory as a temporary work area (temporary area), peripheral boards such as the main control board 100 and the image control board 300, and between each device and an I/O port circuit 204 for inputting and outputting signals.

The effect control CPU 201 reads the effect control program stored in the effect control ROM 202 and executes it on the effect control RAM 203, thereby controlling the effect operation accompanying the progress of the game according to the effect control program. In addition, although not shown, the production control board 200 includes a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and a reset when the production control CPU 201 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state using the system clock, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that generates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on register settings and signals from the CTC circuit, and inputs and outputs serial data. A real-time clock circuit (hereinafter referred to as an "RTC circuit") having a timekeeping function and a serial communication circuit are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The production control board 200 generates an image control command for instructing the image and sound output to the image control board 300 in the production control processing according to the production control command from the main control board 100, and in addition, the lamp connection It generates a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the substrate 91, a drive control signal (driving data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of two-way communication. An image control command relating to images and sounds is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, and as a response, a response command (so-called ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received. is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200 .

The performance control board 200 is connected to the speaker 11 for outputting sound, and the performance control CPU 201 controls the sound data generated by the image control board 300 to be output to the speaker 11 .

The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 equipped with a plurality of LED drivers, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line for transmitting the lamp data. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line in synchronization with the clock signal.

The lamp connection board 91 incorporates an LED driver that functions upon receiving a lamp control signal for LED driving transmitted from the effect control board 200 . The lamp connection board 91 supplies or cuts off the drive current to the effect lamps 10, 25 by switching on/off the switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal, thereby turning on or off the effect lamps 10, 25. control to allow

Furthermore, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and transmits a drive control signal (driving data) for driving the character to the motor driver 92 via the I/O port circuit 204. Output. The motor driver 92 supplies a driving current to the stepping motor of each movable role by switching on/off the switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for driving the role that is transmitted from the production control board 200. Turn on or off, and operate each movable accessory. Data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method. It should be noted that, not limited to this embodiment, as long as the drive source for the role is a drive source other than a stepping motor, instead of the motor driver 92, a driver IC corresponding to the drive source is provided with a control signal or Control data is sent.

The image control board 300 has an image control CPU 301 , a ROM 304 , a RAM 305 and an I/O port circuit 306 . The image control CPU 301 executes various kinds of arithmetic processing related to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200 . A ROM 304 stores an image control program, various data, and the like. The RAM 305 functions as a work area as a temporary storage area and as a buffer memory. The I/O port circuit 306 inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices.

The image control CPU 301 reads out an image control program from the ROM 304, loads it into the RAM 305, and executes it, thereby controlling image display operations related to effects according to the image control program. The ROM 304 corresponds to the ROM on the effect control ROM board.

Furthermore, the image control board 300 has a VDP 302 that generates image data according to the content of the presentation based on the control signal obtained from the image control CPU 301, and a sound data that follows the content of the presentation based on the control signal obtained from the image control CPU 301. A sound source IC 303 for generating is mounted. The VDP 302 is a so-called graphic processor, which reads image data stored in an image ROM (not shown) according to an instruction from the image control CPU 301 , performs image processing on the image data, and outputs a generated video signal to the effect display device 70 . Output for The VDP 302 is connected to a high-speed VRAM (not shown) used for developing and processing image data read out from the image ROM. The sound source IC 303 reads sound data stored in a sound ROM (not shown) in response to an instruction from the image control CPU 301 and synthesizes the read data to generate sound data. The generated sound data is output to the speaker 11 via the effect control board 200 and the amplifier.

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board 400 includes a payout control CPU 401 , a payout control ROM 402 and a payout control RAM 403 . The payout control board 400 drives the prize ball payout unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to control the game ball payout operation (prize ball operation). The ball feeding mechanism 13 and the shooting mechanism 14 are synchronously driven to control the shooting operation of the game balls.

<Power board>
The power supply board 600 includes a normal power supply circuit, a backup power supply circuit, and a power interruption monitoring circuit. The normal power supply circuit generates a normal power supply used by each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the gaming machine island. A backup power circuit generates a backup power supply. The power-off monitoring circuit has a function of monitoring power-off due to voltage drop.

The power supply board 600 generates and supplies a power supply voltage necessary for electronic/electric parts such as each control board and game equipment. A power switch 600q is connected to the power board 600 for activating the power circuit. Predetermined power is supplied from a normal power supply circuit to each control board and the like.

The power board 600 has a function of detecting that the power supply from the power supply device of the gaming machine island has been cut off (hereinafter also referred to as "power cutoff"), and when the power cutoff is detected, a power cutoff signal notifies that effect. (NMI signal) is transmitted to the main control board 100 , the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400 . The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged while power is supplied to the game machine from the power supply device of the game machine island. A RAM clear switch 400q and a door open sensor 2q are connected to the power supply board 600 . The RAM clear switch 400q is a switch for temporarily erasing the stored contents of the main control RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value when the game machine is powered on. The door open sensor 2q is a sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. Note that the RAM clear switch 400q and the door open sensor 2q may be connected to other boards such as the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 600, for example.

<Example of basic operation of game machine>
In the gaming machine constructed as described above, a game is started in a state in which game balls are stored in the upper ball tray 8 . First, when the shooting handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are delivered one by one to the shooting mechanism 14 by the ball feeding mechanism 13 provided on the back side of the glass frame 3. , is fired to the game area 20A by the firing mechanism 14 at a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the firing handle 12 .

When a game ball rolling down the game area 20A enters any one of the general winning opening 66, the first starting opening 61, the second starting opening 62 and the big winning opening 64, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. be done. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 transmits to the payout control board 400 a payout control command instructing a prize ball operation corresponding to the type of the winning hole, and the payout control board 400 receives the payout control board 400 to store the command. A game ball in a tank 31 is put out to an upper ball tray 8 or a lower ball tray 9 by a prize ball putting out unit 34. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first starting port 61 or the second starting port 62, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. FIG. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 acquires a lottery random number value of a special symbol when detecting a ball entering the first starting port 61 or the second starting port 62, and increases the random number value up to a predetermined upper limit number. It is temporarily stored as a reserved ball with a special pattern. When a predetermined variation start condition is established, the main control CPU 101 then executes determination of whether a special symbol is appropriate or not and determination of a symbol for the lottery random number value related to the first reserved ball, and variation pattern determination to select a variation pattern. , and the special symbols are variably displayed using the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in a mode according to the determination result. Along with this, the main control CPU 101 causes the image control board 300 to cause the effect display device 70 to execute the variable display of decorative symbols and the display of the variable effect by transmitting an effect control command to the effect control board 200 . The variable display of the special design and the decorative design is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Here, various lottery random numbers are acquired when a ball is entered into the first start port 61 or the second start port 62, and further, the acquired random numbers are reserved and the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. In this case, regarding the execution of the special symbol game by the special symbol display device, the processing that results in the execution of the special symbol game is referred to as "starting condition (established)".

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit in the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 64 is started according to the operation of the special electric accessory 642 . On the other hand, the mode of stopping the decorative symbols indicating a big hit in the effect display device 70 is, for example, a mode in which the types of the three symbols are the same. In this embodiment, as special games, the 10R special game in which the round game is set to 10 times (10 rounds), the 5R special game in which the round game is set to 5 times (5 rounds), and the round game twice A 2R special game set to (2 rounds) is prepared.

In this embodiment, even if it is shifted to any of the 10R special game, the 5R special game and the 2R special game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined final number (also referred to as "ST number"). The probability variation function of special symbols (also referred to as "probability variation") operates over the period until reaching (also referred to as "ST period"). That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol probability variation function is limited until the number of times of ST is reached, rather than continuing until the occurrence of the next big hit. When the special symbol probability variation function is activated in this way, the special symbol lottery jackpot probability shifts from a low probability state to a high probability state, so that the probability of reaching a new jackpot relatively early becomes high.

On the other hand, after the special game ends, the main control CPU 101 may operate a special symbol variation time reduction function (hereinafter also referred to as "time reduction") in conjunction with or separately from the special symbol probability variation function. When the special pattern fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of special patterns (and decorative patterns) tends to be shorter than usual, the number of special pattern lotteries per unit time is improved, and the last big hit ends. It becomes easier to win the next big hit in a shorter period of time.

Furthermore, the main control CPU 101 operates a so-called electric chew support function (normal electric accessories support function) together with the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function. In the electric chew support function, any function or a combination of the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessory 622 open extension function operates. When the normal symbol probability variation function operates, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is shortened, and the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 622 is changed from that during the normal game state (when the electric chew support function is not activated). (For example, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 622 is extended more than usual), a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start port 62 (also referred to as “easy ball entry state”). When the opening time extension function of the normal electric accessory 622 is activated, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 622 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, increasing the possibility that the number of normal symbol variations per fixed time period will increase more than in the normal state, and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 622 is opened. Since the activation of the time extension function also improves the ease of entering the second starting hole 62, the number of balls entering the second starting hole 62 is more likely to increase. Therefore, due to the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the electric chew support function, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second start hole 62 during the period are increased, and as a result, the player can The game can be continued in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls as compared with the normal game state.

<Example of main functional configuration of game machine>
The outline of the game operation of the gaming machine according to this embodiment is as described above. Next, the main functions of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the functions of the main control board 100 installed in the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

The main control board 100 includes entering ball determination means 110, game lottery random number generation means 120, reservation control means 130, advance determination means 135, special symbol lottery processing means 140, normal symbol lottery processing means 145, special game control means 150, and symbols. Display control means 155 , electric accessory control means 160 , game state control means 169 , error monitoring control means 170 , main information storage means 180 and command transmission/reception means 190 are included. The above-described means in the main control board 100 include the main control CPU 101 provided on the main control board 100, the main control ROM 102, the main control RAM 103, hardware such as electronic circuits, and the main control ROM 102. Although it is composed of software such as a control program, it is represented here as a functional block.

The entering ball determination means 110 detects each detection signal from the first starting opening switch 161, the second starting opening switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the big winning opening switch 164, the general winning opening switch 166, the out ball detection switch 167, and the like. Based on, it is determined whether a game ball enters each winning hole or the like.

The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated in the random number generation circuit described above, and adds a special symbol per soft random number to it to generate a special per symbol random number used for a special symbol win/fail lottery. to generate The game lottery random number generating means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by program processing of the main control CPU 101 . These random number counters function as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software.

As the software random numbers, there are special symbol per soft random numbers that are added to the above built-in random numbers to form special symbol per random numbers, special per symbol soft initial value random numbers for determining the initial value and end value of the special per symbol soft random numbers. , Special symbol random number per special symbol used to determine the winning symbol (combination of symbols that will activate the condition device, combination of lost symbols, etc.) as a stop symbol of the special symbol, initial value and end value of symbol random number per special symbol Design initial value random number per special design for determining, special design variation pattern random number for use in selecting the variation pattern of special design, random number per normal design for use in winning or not lottery of normal design, random number per normal design An initial value random number per normal design for determining the initial value and end value of, and a normal design variation pattern random number for use in selecting a normal design variation pattern. In addition, the above-mentioned hit pattern means a winning pattern.

These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs, and the initial value random numbers use the remaining time of the interrupt cycle even while the timer interrupt process is not being executed (during loop processing). to update.

Reservation control means 130 includes special symbol reservation control means 131 and normal symbol reservation control means 132 . The special symbol retention control means 131 is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 61 or the second start port 62, and the special symbol per random number, which is the lottery random number related to the special symbol game. A symbol random number value and a special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation reservation ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol reservation control means 131 stores the main information so as to combine the operation reservation ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) with the ball entry order of the reservation ball. It is temporarily stored in the first special symbol reserve storage area or the second special symbol reserve storage area of the means 180 .

In the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), the reservation 2 storage area (2 reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area). Each reservation storage area can store a set of random numbers per special symbol, random numbers per special symbol, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers as operation retention ball information. The operation pending ball information is stored in the order of the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area, while the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area. Regions are digested in order according to the so-called first-in first-out principle. When the hold ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is shifted to storage areas with lower numbers, and the hold 4 storage area. Clear the contents of the memory area to zero.

The special symbol retention control means 131 includes a first special symbol retention ball number counter for counting the number of operation retention balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol retention ball number for counting the number of operation retention balls of the second special symbol. It has a ball number counter. The special symbol reservation control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one operation reservation ball of the special symbol is acquired as an update processing of the number of operation reservation balls of the special symbol, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

The special symbol reservation control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command including the update information of the number of reservation balls ("symbol memory number command ”) and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . This one command includes information on both the number of activated balls with the first special symbol and the number of activated balls with the second special symbol. In principle, the operation reserve balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entry, but in this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed rather than the first special symbol. , In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game exists, regardless of the existence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game Configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation pending ball of the second special symbol, even if an operation pending ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation pending ball of the first special symbol is digested. will be put on hold.

The normal symbol holding control means 132 is triggered by the fact that the game ball rolling and flowing down the game area 20A has passed through the gate 63, and is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game. A random number value and a normal pattern variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as normal symbol operation retention ball information. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 controls the normal symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180 so that up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) of normal symbol operation reservation ball information is combined with the ball entry order of the reservation ball. temporarily stored in The normal design reservation control means 132 has a normal design reservation ball number counter for counting the number of normal design operation reservation balls. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation reservation ball of the normal symbol is obtained as update processing of the number of operation normal symbol reservation balls, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

The pre-determination means 135 executes pre-determination for pre-reading notice targeting the operation-reserving ball with a special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing. As an example of the pre-determining timing, (1) while waiting for a hit, and when the electric chew support function is not in operation, when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired, (2) while waiting for a hit, and when the electric chew If the second special symbol operation reserve ball is obtained while the support function is operating, or (3) if the second special symbol operation reserve ball is obtained during the big win or small win, either of the conditions It's time to be satisfied. In the main control board 100, regardless of the timing when the operation reservation ball is acquired, the preliminary determination is executed and the information is transmitted to the effect control board 200, and the effect control board 200 is responsible for all whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed. It is also possible to decide

Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the operation reservation ball acquired this time from the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the winning lottery. Pre-determination (advance/deny pre-determination), pre-determination of symbol lottery (pre-determination of symbol), pre-determination of variation pattern lottery (pre-determination of variation pattern) are sequentially executed. The pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown, but it corresponds to the total number of random numbers in the same way as the lottery table (special symbol success or failure lottery table, special symbol per symbol table, fluctuation pattern table) described later. The area is partitioned into a plurality of areas, and a lottery ID is assigned to each area (determination value number). In addition, if the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means 135 corresponds to the random number value used for the lottery when the variation is actually started, the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area Data temporarily held in a RAM or a register of a CPU may be pre-determined instead of the data stored in the memory.

As this lottery ID, a number indicating the result of preliminary determination (also referred to as “pre-determination number”) is set. The pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates effect control commands (referred to as "pre-determination commands") including information on pre-determination results (pre-determination numbers), and stores them in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. . It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, not only when transmitting the information (lottery ID) to which random value range the pre-determination result belongs to, but also using a success or failure lottery table or the like used when actually starting the fluctuation It is also possible to transmit the result of a lottery drawn in advance.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141 , special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 . The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the special symbol variation start condition is established, selects a special symbol per random value stored in the first storage area (holding 1 storage area) of the special symbol holding storage area in the main information storage means 180. , the special symbol per symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out and stored in the special symbol validity determination area, the special symbol determination area and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "the special symbol fluctuation start condition is established" means, for example, in the case of adopting the priority control of the second special symbol as in the present embodiment, (1) it is not a big hit or a small hit, (2) Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are on standby, (3) At least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has an operation pending ball. It means to satisfy If all these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbols are ready to start varying.

The special symbol success/failure determination means 141 reads out the special symbol hit random number value from the special symbol success/failure determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the success/failure determination, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. to decide. The result of this success/failure determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data (for example "55H"), small hit data (for example "33H"), and loss data (for example "00H"), after being used in subsequent processes, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops.The special symbol validity determination means 141 refers to the special symbol success/fail lottery table during this success/failure determination.In addition, The "H" shown after each data above is an acronym for "Hexadecimal" and means that the data is expressed in hexadecimal.For example, if "55H" is 1 It indicates that the byte data is “01010101B (“B” is a binary number).” Especially when notation in decimal notation, the symbol is not added or “D” is added for explanation.

FIG. 22(A) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol success/failure lottery table referred to in a normal state as a so-called low probability state, and FIG. 22(B) is referred to in a variable state as a so-called high probability state It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol success or failure lottery table.

In this special symbol hit/fail lottery table, the special symbol hit random number value is associated with the determination result of the big hit, the small hit and the loss. Winning probabilities of big wins and small wins are determined according to the range of random numbers associated in this way. As can be seen from these FIGS. 22(A) and 22(B), in the winning lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), the big hit is only when the random number falls within the range of "0 to 219". becomes. On the other hand, in the probability state (high probability state), the range of the jackpot is expanded, and not only when the random number falls within the range of "0 to 219", but also when it falls within the range of "220 to 2184" It will be a big hit. That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the lottery probability of the big win varies from a low probability state (approximately 1/300) to a high probability state (approximately 1/30).

Thus, although the range corresponding to the big win changes according to the game state, the winning probability of the big win is the same between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. Here, even if the special symbol per random number value does not fall within the range of the big win, it will be a small win if it falls within the predetermined range. In the present embodiment, only the winning lottery for the first special symbol has a small winning, but for example, a small winning is also prepared for the winning lottery for the second special symbol. The lottery may be structured so as to give a small win at a higher probability than the lottery for the first special symbol, or a small win may be prepared only for the lottery for the second special symbol.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be provided with a setting change function for changing the degree of advantage for the player in the game by setting values in multiple stages. When the settings are changed in such a pachinko machine 1, the random value range for the big hits is changed according to the settings (set values). Therefore, a special symbol success/failure lottery table with different jackpot ranges is prepared according to the set value. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the ratio between the big win lottery probability in the low probability state and the big win lottery probability in the high probability state is constant regardless of the set value. Specifically, for example, regarding the jackpot lottery probability when the set value is "1", if the low probability state is 1/300 and the high probability state is 1/30 (10 times the low probability state), The jackpot lottery probability when the set value is "6" is 1/25 in the high probability state (10 times the low probability state) when the low probability state is 1/250.

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs based on the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. do. The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 is a first special symbol winning symbol table referred to when determining the stop symbol and symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit. And it has a symbol table per second special symbol.

In the first special symbol per symbol table, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), for the special symbol per symbol random number, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (special symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction The number of times the function is operated and the operation pattern of the big winning opening 64) are associated with each other. In addition, the numerical value "100" in parentheses means the number of times of operation of the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the special symbol, ie, the number of times of ST. In this table, the stop symbols "1" to "8" of the first special symbols are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the winning symbol table is not shown when the winning lottery is lost and the small winning is a single action. If you want to change the variation pattern or change the control mode of the special electric accessory by giving the type of the loss or the small hit to the winning pattern or the small winning pattern. Also in the case of a miss or a small hit, the winning pattern table may be used to determine the pattern.

Specifically, the patterns "1", "2", "3", and "4" are the pattern group A (10R specific time saving pattern), and the patterns "5" and "6" are the pattern group B (5R specific time saving pattern) is associated with the patterns "7" and "8", respectively, with the pattern group C (2R specific time saving pattern). It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the "specific pattern" is a pattern that will activate the probability variation function after the end of the special game, while the "normal design" means that the probability variation function will be activated after the end of the special game. It is a design that does not allow the player to play (the same applies to the second special design described later).

The symbol groups A and B are specific symbols indicating a so-called "probability variation hit" that shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probability variation state (high probability state), and the number of variations of the special symbol is a big hit within the ST number. , or until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probability variation function of special symbols, the variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function are given. be. As for the symbol group A, the prescribed number of rounds of the special game is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. On the other hand, for the symbol group B, the prescribed number of rounds of the special game is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

The symbol group C shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols, although the number of times and the opening time of the large winning opening 64 are different from those of the above-mentioned "variable probability win". , It is a specific symbol that indicates a so-called "sudden probability change hit", until the number of variations of the special symbol ends without causing a big hit within the ST number, or until the next big hit occurs within the ST number Limited to between, the special symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function will be given. The specified number of rounds of the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 1.8 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the win/fail lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the special symbol per random number is omitted, and the symbol "9" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol "9" is associated with the symbol group F (special electric operation symbol 1). In addition, in the case of a small hit, the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time reduction function, electric chew support function) and the change pattern selection state are not triggered, and the game state is maintained before and after the lottery. be done. If the result of the lottery is a loss, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23(B), in the above-described second special symbol per symbol table, with respect to the special symbol per symbol random number, the stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (special symbol probability variation function and the number of times of operation of the variable time reduction function, and the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642. In this second special symbol per symbol table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbols are associated with each other. , according to the type of the jackpot, are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E. Specifically, symbol group D ( 10R specific time-saving pattern) is associated with patterns "15", "16", "17", and "18" with pattern group E (5R specific time-saving pattern).

The symbol groups D and E are specific symbols indicating a so-called "probability variation hit" that shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probability variation state (high probability state), and the number of variations of the special symbols is a big hit within the ST number. , or until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probability variation function of special symbols, the variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function are given. sell. As for the pattern group D, the prescribed number of rounds of the special game is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. As for the symbol group E, the prescribed number of rounds of the special game is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the win/fail lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the special symbol per random number is omitted, and the symbol "19" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol "19" is associated with a symbol group G (special electric operation symbol 2). In addition, in the case of a small hit, it does not trigger a change in the game state (probability variation function, variation time reduction function, electric chew support function) and variation pattern selection state, and the winning result may be different before and after the lottery. It is determined whether or not the end condition of the game state such as the probability variation function is satisfied in the same way as in the other case, and when the end condition is not satisfied, the game state when it is determined as a small win is maintained. If the result of the lottery is a loss, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the jackpot type, three types of 10R jackpot (10R specific time reduction pattern), 5R jackpot (5R specific time reduction pattern) and 2R jackpot (2R specific time reduction pattern) are prepared. . The expected value of winning a prize ball (expected value of winning a prize ball) in the special game is in the order of 10R big win>5R big win>2R big win. Therefore, hereinafter, the 10R jackpot is also referred to as the "high-profit jackpot" with the highest expected value for winning prize balls, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as the "low-profit jackpot" with the lowest expected value for winning prize balls. It should be noted that even if the number of execution rounds is the same, when the long open round game (30 seconds) and the short open round game (1.8 seconds) are mixed, the big hit with many long open round games is "high". Profit jackpot.”

Specifically, although the special game has a common number of rounds to be executed, such as unifying the number of rounds to be executed to 10 rounds, a special game in which the mode of the round game changes in a predetermined round may be included. In that case, a special game of a type consisting only of short opening round games in which the opening time of the big winning opening 64 is relatively short, and a long game in which the opening time of the big winning opening 64 is relatively long after the predetermined number of execution rounds. A special game of the kind that switches to an open round game may also be included, the latter constituting a "high profit jackpot". Even with the same number of executed rounds, the actual profit, that is, the expected value of winning the prize ball may be different depending on the difference in the pattern of opening the big prize hole.

Here, as can be seen from the above description, if the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the 10R jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the second special symbol is a success or failure. When the lottery results in a big win, the 10R big win is selected with a probability of 75%. This is advantageous for the player in that it is more likely that more balls can be obtained by entering the second starting hole 62 than by entering the first starting hole 61 with the game ball. It should be noted that the count number (prescribed count number) is the maximum possible number of game balls entering the big winning opening 64 in the round game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 shown in FIG. 20 determines a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 has a plurality of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern, as illustrated in FIGS. 24 and 25 to be described later. The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects one of these variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the lottery. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of variation patterns. In addition, in each figure, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the "selection rate" is indicated, but in fact the judgment value (random value range) is set, and the variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random number belongs to. Various fluctuation patterns have a fluctuation time determined for each of the fluctuation patterns as a termination condition of the pattern fluctuation, and it is assumed that the pattern fluctuation by the decorative pattern composed of a plurality of patterns is also executed during the fluctuation time. defined as In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of variation patterns will be described as an example, but in reality there are many more variation patterns.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for big wins and small wins. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a probability variation pattern table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In this embodiment, the variation pattern to be selected is set to be different depending on the variation pattern selection state or depending on the jackpot type even in the same variation pattern selection state.

In the normal variation pattern table (A1), when the jackpot type is the 10R jackpot, the variation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the variation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected, and when the 5R jackpot is selected, the variation pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or variation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or the variation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal variation pattern table for big wins and small wins, no non-reach mode variation pattern is selected, and only the reach mode variation pattern is selected when a big win or a small win occurs in the normal state. obtain.

In the probability variation pattern table (A2), only variation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected when the jackpot type is 10R jackpot or 5R jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, either the variation pattern PZ6 (normal reach B) or the variation pattern PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. In this probability variation pattern table for big hits and small hits, non-reach mode variation patterns are not selected, and only reach mode variation patterns are used when a big hit or a small hit occurs in the probability variation state of special symbols. can be selected.

In the special variation pattern table (A3), when the jackpot type is the 10R jackpot, only the variation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected, and when the 5R jackpot, only the variation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected. is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, only the variation pattern PZ10 (super reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PX9 of the non-reach C mode is configured as a super-short variation time (2 seconds), while the variation patterns PY10 and PZ10 of the super reach C mode are configured as a relatively long variation time (120 seconds). be done.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a deviation pattern table. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (B2) is a probability variation pattern table, and the lower (B3) is a special variation pattern table. In this embodiment, the variation pattern to be selected is set to be different according to the variation pattern selection state and the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol.

The normal variation pattern table (B1) assumes that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected (because the variation of the first special symbol is the main subject in the normal game state). In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3 corresponding to non-reach A, fluctuation patterns PH1-4, PH1-5 corresponding to non-reach B, normal reach A (N reach Either PH2 corresponding to A), PH3 corresponding to super reach A (SP reach A), or PH4 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D) is selected. In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), fluctuations of non-reach A are excluded from prefetching, and fluctuations other than non-reach A are prefetched.

In addition, in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), the fluctuation patterns PH1-4 and PH1-5 corresponding to the non-reach B may change the selection rate depending on the number of reservations. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the reach area (N reach A, SP reach A, SP reach D) basically does not change the selectivity according to the number of reservations. However, like N reach A, in the case of low expected reach type, the selection rate may be changed according to the number of reservations. For example, when the number of holds is small, by lowering the selection rate of non-reach A and non-reach B and increasing the selection rate of N reach A, the fluctuation time becomes longer, so the situation where the fluctuation display is not performed is avoided. An effect can be obtained, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

The probability variation pattern table (B2) assumes that the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected (in the probability variation state, the second special symbol is mainly varied). In the probability variation pattern table (B2), variation patterns PH5-1 and PH5-2 corresponding to non-reach B, PH6 corresponding to normal reach B (N reach B), PH7 corresponding to super reach B (SP reach B), Or PH8 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D) is selected. In the probability variation pattern table (B2), the variation of non-reach B is excluded from prefetching, and the variation other than non-reach B is prefetched.

In the special fluctuation pattern table (B3), only the fluctuation pattern PH9 corresponding to non-reach C is selected. Here, the variation pattern PH9 of the non-reach C mode is configured as a super-shortened variation time (2 seconds). In the special fluctuation pattern table (B3), all are excluded from prefetching.

In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 25, when the result of the winning lottery is lost, it is set so that a different variation pattern table is selected according to the number (0 to 4) of the operation suspension balls of the special symbol. can be done. In other words, by using a variation pattern table corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of special symbols, the larger the number of operation pending balls, the higher the proportion of relatively short fluctuation time selected, and on the contrary, the smaller the number of operation pending. , the rate at which a relatively long variation time is selected can be increased. Moreover, it is also possible to divide according to the kind of a special design as a fluctuation pattern table. For example, in a state where the electric chew support function such as the probability fluctuation state is in operation, it is a state in which it is easy to display the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and as shown in FIG. is advantageous, by setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to a long time, it is possible to create time for accumulating the holding of the second special symbol, which is to be preferentially variable and controlled. can.

For example, in the case of FIG. 25, in the probability variation pattern table (B2) that is supposed to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the selection rate of the entire non-reach B (variation patterns PH5-1, PH5-2) is a constant 750/1000 regardless of the number of reservations. However, looking at the distribution of the fluctuation patterns PH5-1 and PH5-2 according to the number of holds, the situation where the holds are accumulated (“number of holds 2 → 1”, “number of holds 3 → 2”, “number of holds 4 → 3 ”), the variation pattern PH5-1 (5 seconds) with a short variation time is likely to be selected, whereas in a situation where there is no hold (“number of holds 1 → 0”), the variation pattern PH5- with a long variation time 2 (10 seconds) is likely to be selected. According to the distribution in this way, when the holding of the second special symbol is reduced in the probability variable state in which the second special symbol is preferentially digested, the longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected, so the second special symbol It becomes easy to expect the addition of a hold, and it is possible to suppress a disadvantageous situation in which all the holds of the second special symbols are digested and the holding digestion of the first special symbols is started.

After selecting the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 issues an effect control command including special symbol variation pattern information ("variation pattern designation command"), special design (design group) and production control command including game state information (referred to as "design designation command"), production command including information on the number of reservations after the start of fluctuation ("design memory number command”) (hereinafter collectively referred to as “variation start command”), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has normal symbol suitability determination means 146 , normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 , and normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 . The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol reserve storage area when the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied. They are stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively.

The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads the normal symbol hit random number value from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the suitability determination, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to hit or lose. do. The result of this lottery is temporarily stored as a normal symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180, and after being used in subsequent processing, is cleared when the normal symbol fluctuation stops. The normal symbol success/failure determination means 146 holds a normal symbol success/failure lottery table referred to during this success/failure lottery. In the normal state (low probability state), the normal symbol success/failure determination means 146 refers to the normal symbol success/failure lottery table, which is a hit with a probability of, for example, "160/283", while the probability variation state of the normal symbol (high probability state) ), for example, by referring to a normal symbol success/failure lottery table with a probability of "282/283", a normal symbol success/failure lottery is executed.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table, and selects a predetermined winning symbol when the result of the winning lottery is a hit, and a predetermined winning symbol when the result is a loss. Select a missing pattern. In addition, when it is desired to have a plurality of control patterns for a normal electric accessory, it may be designed to have a plurality of lottery results of the symbol lottery table of normal symbols. Also, even if the winning normal symbols are the same, the control pattern of the normal electric accessory can be varied depending on whether or not the game state is in operation of the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to display the normal symbol variation in the normal state. , a relatively long variation time is selected (for example, seven types of "4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds" are uniformly selected). On the other hand, a relatively short variation time (for example, "0.5 seconds") is selected in the time-saving state of normal symbols (entering easy state).

The special game control means 150, when the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot, relates to the start demonstration effect and the end demo effect displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the special game, according to the type of the determined jackpot. Determine the duration of the demonstration. Special game control means 150, to the effect control board 200 side, the effect control command to instruct the execution of the start demonstration effect (referred to as "jackpot start demo command"), and the effect control command to instruct the execution of the end demonstration effect. (referred to as a "jackpot end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. FIG. The jackpot start demonstration command also serves as a trigger for determining the contents of a series of jackpot productions (start demonstration production, round production, end demonstration production) developed during the special game on the production control board 200 side. In addition to the present embodiment, the demonstration performance time determined by the special game control means 150 can be determined based on the game state when the big win is made, in addition to the big win type.

When the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "round effect specifying command") for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the special game, it generates the command. Stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . The round effect specifying command includes a round start command including information on the current number of rounds transmitted at the start of the round, and a large winning effect for executing a winning effect based on the detection of the big winning opening switch 164 during the round game. A winning mouth enable winning command is included.

A special game control means 150 determines a demonstration performance time relating to a small winning start demonstration performance and a small winning end demonstration performance displayed on a performance display device 70 or the like during a small winning game when the result of the winning lottery is a small winning. . The special game control means 150 includes an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing execution of a small hit start demonstration effect, and an effect control command (“small hit end demo command”) and stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. FIG.

The symbol display control means 155 includes special symbol display control means 156 and normal symbol display control means 157 . The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 171 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variation display is completed, the first special symbol. is displayed. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 172 to variably display the second special symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and after the variation display, the second special symbol is definitely displayed. Let The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 171 and the second special symbol display device 172 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 . Special symbol display control means 156, when the special symbol fluctuation stop (that is, when the special symbol game timer is managing the fluctuation time, at the timing when the value becomes "0"), production control An effect control command (referred to as a "variation stop command") for requesting the board 200 to display the decorative pattern is generated.

On the other hand, the normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 175 to variably display the normal symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and also causes the normal symbol to be displayed after the variable display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of normal symbols. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 175 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 .

When the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a big hit, the electric role product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric role product solenoid 124 as special game processing after the special symbols are confirmed and displayed, and a special electric role is performed. Object 642 is opened according to a predetermined actuation pattern. In the special game, one opening and closing operation of the special electric accessory 642 is one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for a specified number of rounds (10R, 5R, 2R in this embodiment). The electric accessory control means 160 holds a big winning opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric accessory 642 has been operated (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, when the jackpot type is a so-called 10R jackpot (symbol groups A and D) or a 5R jackpot (symbol groups B and E), the big prize opening 64 is opened for a maximum of about 30 seconds in one round game. . On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a so-called 2R jackpot (symbol group C), the jackpot 64 is opened for a maximum of about 1.8 seconds in one round game. Here, the condition for closing the big winning opening 64 in the special game (end condition for the round game) is the winning of a prescribed count number of game balls or the elapse of a prescribed number of seconds of an openable period.

The electric auditors control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric auditors solenoid 124 as a small winning game process after the final display of the special symbols when the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a small hit. The electric accessory 642 is opened only for a short period of time. A small winning game is a special game composed of one round game, and is distinguished from a big winning game of a special game composed of a plurality of round games. In particular, both the small winning game and the big winning game are special games in which it is easy to acquire balls based on the operation of the special electric accessory 642. It can be separated by whether or not the accessory continuous operating device is operating.

The electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123 to open the ordinary electric accessory 622 for a predetermined opening time when winning the lottery for the normal symbol. Here, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 622 for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, while in the easy-to-enter state (electric chew support state), the normal electric accessory 622 is opened. The accessory 622 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

The game state control means 169 determines the game state after the end of the special game based on the type of the symbol group related to the big win when the result of the lottery of special symbols is a big hit, and after the end of the special game. Switch the game state of. Below, among the various functions related to the special symbols and normal symbols described above, 1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is referred to as "variable state", 2) The game state in which only the variable time reduction function of special symbols and the electric chew support function operate is called "time saving state", and 3) The game state in which only the probability change function of special symbols operates is called "latent probability variable state". 4) The state in which all functions are not activated is referred to as "normal state". In addition, it can be said that the "probability variable state", the "time saving state", and the "latency probability variable state" are all advantageous game states for the player compared to the "normal state".

Below, each game state is combined with the operating state of the special symbol game (high probability / low probability) and the operating state of the normal symbol game (with electric chew support function operation / without electric chew support function operation), (1 ) “High probability / high base” for the probability state, (2) “Low probability / high base” for the time saving state, (3) “High probability / low base” for the latent probability state, (4) “Low probability” for the normal state / Low base" ("Base" refers to the number of prize balls per number of balls fired, and during the electric chew support function, the possibility of winning prize balls due to the operation of normal electric accessories is referred to as "high base"). In this embodiment, as an example, the game state after the end of the special game, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is counted from the end of the special game until it reaches a predetermined final number (that is, the above-mentioned ST number) (However, if the next big hit occurs within the ST number, the variable probability state ends with the change, and at the end of the big hit game, the corresponding game state). It should be noted that when a small hit occurs during the ST period, the ST number is not reset to 0, and the ST number is continuously counted before and after the occurrence of the small hit. In this embodiment, the number of times of ST is set to 100 times as an example, but it may be set to another number of times. In addition, when it shifts to the definite variable state, the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate at the same time, and each function continues as long as the definite variable state continues.

When the result of the lottery for special symbols is a big hit, regardless of whether the game state before the big win is a normal state or a variable probability state, the normal state is maintained during the special game and the number of STs is increased after the special game. As a limit, it will be in a constant variable state. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery for special symbols is a small win, if the game state before the small win is normal, the game state during and after the small win is also normal. When the game state before the small winning is the probability variable state of the special symbol, the game state during the small winning game and after the small winning game is also the variable probability state of the special symbol.

The game state control means 169 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type of the jackpot (the type of the symbol groups A to E) when the result of the win/fail lottery is a big win, and after the special game Toggle the variation pattern selection state of . The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the aforementioned variation pattern table. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is when the special game ends or when the number of termination times of the variation pattern selection state is completed. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern selection state, there are three types such as "low probability normal variation state α", "high probability shortened variation state β", and "high probability special variation state γ". Here, the low probability normal fluctuation state α refers to the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1 in FIG. 24 and B1 in FIG. 25) that is selected when the game state is a normal state (low probability state). This is the state that determines the fluctuation pattern. The high probability shortened variation state β refers to the probability variation pattern table (A2 in FIG. 24 and B2 in FIG. 25) that is selected when the gaming state is a probability variation state of special symbols (excluding a limited period described later) It is in the state of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. The high-probability special variation state γ means that the game state is a special symbol probability variation state, and the number of symbol variations corresponding to the maximum number (4) of the second special symbol operation pending balls for a certain period immediately after the end of the special game Period over (4 times) fluctuation display: Refer to the special fluctuation pattern table (A3 in FIG. 24 and B3 in FIG. 25) that allows selection only (referred to as “limited period”) Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is in a state to In this embodiment, even if any of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state is: (1) Immediately after the special game is finished, the high probability special variation state γ only for a limited period of 4 symbol variations. (2) After the limited period ends, and when the number of executions is within the number of STs (100 times), stay in the high-probability shortened fluctuation state β, (3) After the number of STs ends, that is, After the 101st execution, it stays in the low-probability normal fluctuation state α. Of course, the low-probability normal fluctuation state α remains until the first hit occurs. In addition, the game state control means 169 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "game state designation command") including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area. In addition, not limited to this embodiment, it may be possible to have a plurality of special fluctuation states γ and make it possible to refer to different special fluctuation states at different timings during the period of one fluctuation time reduction game state ( For example, stay in the special variation state γ1 four times after the end of the big hit, further stay in the shortened variation state β 95 times, and then provide a special variation state γ2 in which one special symbol game is played).

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I/O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, door/frame opening signal, etc. , determines whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, in order to instruct the effect control board 200 to perform an error state effect, a effect control command ("error effect designation command") including the error information is requested. Although not all shown in FIG. 19, the door open switch is detecting means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 3 is open. The back set release switch is a detection means for detecting whether or not the back set board is open. A magnetic sensor and a radio wave sensor are detection means for discovering fraudulent behavior (so-called fraudulent behavior).

The main information storage means 180 stores the random number information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation reservation ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the game state related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game (probability variable state, time saving state, easy ball entry state), information on the selection state of the variation pattern, information on the result of the winning lottery (big win, small win, loss), information on the stop symbols and variation patterns related to special and normal symbols, information on the special game (round number, opening time, opening mode (opening times per round game), etc.), status information indicating the operating state of the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 642, production control command It is configured to temporarily store information necessary for controlling the progress of the game, such as data information, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each piece of information.

The command transmission/reception means 190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the performance control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when there is a command transmission request. It is Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. "1", and the 7th bit of the EVENT data is "0". A strobe signal is output for each of the MODE data and the EVENT data when the information is transmitted as valid.

The production control board 200 can receive the MODE data and the EVENT data, respectively, upon receiving the strobe signal output in this way. Effect control commands generated in each process are, in principle, sent as MODE data and EVENT data one command at each interrupt cycle in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

The setting change means 195 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the front frame 4 is in the open state (the door open sensor 2p detects door opening) and the setting key switch 100q is in the ON state, the setting change means 195 turns on the power switch 600q while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q. If so, the state is shifted to the setting change state described above.

The setting change unit 195 causes the setting display unit 197 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory (for example, part of the RAM storage area provided by the main control RAM 103) when the setting change state is entered. The setting display unit 197 displays the setting values using, for example, a 7-segment display provided on the main control board 100 . At this time, the setting change unit 195 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 197 from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4"→"5" in response to pressing of a predetermined setting change button. →“6”→“1”→ . In this example, the RAM clear switch 400q is used as the setting change button, but other buttons may be used, or a dedicated button may be provided. Then, when the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting change means 195 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display section 197. FIG.

The setting confirmation means 196 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. The setting confirmation means 196 turns on the power switch 600q without pressing the RAM clear switch 400q when the front frame 4 is in the open state (door open sensor 2p detects door opening) and the setting key switch 100q is in the on state. If so, the setting confirmation state described above is entered.

The setting confirmation means 196 causes the setting display section 197 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. However, unlike the setting change unit 195 described above, the setting confirmation unit 196 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 197 even if the setting change button (for example, the RAM clear switch 400q) is pressed. Also, the setting values stored in the setting memory are not changed. When the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting confirmation means 196 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 197. FIG.

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may be numbers "0" to "5" instead of numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , setting value “4” may correspond to setting 5, and setting value “5” may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the set value data is set to the initial value "0", it will not be determined to be abnormal. can be simplified. In addition, when executing a lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the prefetch process, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as the offset data. When numerical values of "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the setting change means 195 and the setting confirmation means 196 may cause the setting display section 197 to display the numerical values of the set value data as they are. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 197 . In the latter case, the numeric data of "0" to "5" are converted into the numeric values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the manager of the gaming machine.

FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram showing an example of functions of the effect control board 200 in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. The effect control board 200 includes effect lottery random number generation means 210, effect control means 220, lamp effect control means 230, character object effect control means 240, error effect control means 250, effect control information storage means 260, and command transmission/reception means 270. . It should be noted that the above-mentioned means in the effect control board 200, effect control CPU201 arranged on the effect control board 200, effect control ROM202, effect control RAM203, hardware such as an electronic circuit, and a control program stored in the effect control ROM202 It is a functional representation of what is configured by software such as

The effect lottery random number generating means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by program processing of the effect control CPU 201 . These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include the pre-reading notice lottery random number used to determine whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed, the pre-reading notice pattern random number used to select the pre-reading notice pattern, the decorative pattern random number used to select the decorative pattern stop pattern, decoration Fluctuation effect pattern random number used to select the variable effect pattern of the pattern, notice effect pattern random number used to select the notice effect pattern, jackpot effect pattern random number used to select the jackpot effect pattern, whether or not to execute the pending internal rendezvous effect The lottery drawing random numbers used for the lottery, the Renso production pattern random numbers used for selecting the Renso production pattern for the reservation internal production, and the like are included. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the later-described effect control side main process. Although the random numbers used for each lottery are given names for convenience, random numbers that are commonly used may be used.

The effect control means 220 includes effect mode control means 221, reserved information display control means 222, pre-reading notice control means 223, decoration pattern determination means 224, fluctuation effect determination means 225, notice effect determination means 226 and jackpot effect determination means 227. .

The holding information display control means 222 has a first holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and a second holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. have. Retention information display control means 222, when receiving the symbol memory number command from the main control board 100, based on the information of the operation retention ball number included in this symbol memory number command, the first retention ball number counter and the second retention ball Update the value of the number counter. Then, the pending information display control means 222 displays the pending display portion of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first pending ball number counter and the second pending ball number counter. The number of reserved images and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. In the normal display mode, when a special symbol operation pending ball occurs, a white display pending image is displayed. The image can take any one of "white" as a normal display mode (display color) and "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow color" as a special display mode (display color). The above four types of special display modes are related to the reliability of the lottery result being a big hit (referred to as "jackpot reliability"). It is set so that the reliability of the big hit increases one step at a time. In the present embodiment, when the pending image changes to "rainbow color", the big hit is definite in the operation pending ball to be read ahead. Note that in the pending change look-ahead preview effect, the change in the display mode of the pending image may be represented by a shape, pattern, or the like instead of the display color.

Triggered by the reception of the advance determination command from the main control board 100, the pre-reading notice control means 223 decides by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice. The pre-reading notice control means 223 distinguishes between the information of the preliminary determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the preliminary determination result of the second special symbol, and each enters a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) of the operation reservation ball. Temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 so as to be combined with the order. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the reservation storage area of the main control board 100, and the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), A reserved 2 storage area (second reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of propriety pre-determination, information on the pre-determination result of pattern, and information on the pre-determination result of variation pattern as a set.

When judging whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, the pre-reading notice control means 223 makes a pre-reading judgment (“pre-reading judgment”) for the ball that is subject to the pre-reading notice based on the result of the advance judgment by the main control board 100. ) is executed. In the present embodiment, in the look-ahead notice, in addition to the above-mentioned pending change look-ahead notice, a so-called continuous notice effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot winning or a ready-to-win effect occurs over a plurality of continuous display of the decorative pattern. have If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) can be executed, the information of the pre-determination command from the main control board 100 (result of pre-determination) and the information of the pattern memory number command (the number of balls that are currently in operation) Through analysis, a pre-reading forewarning performance pattern over a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery targeting the operation suspension ball (called "trigger suspension") that triggers the occurrence of the current foreseeing forefront presentation. Note that there are various variations of the prefetching notice, such as a pending change prefetching notice effect, a chance eye prefetching notice effect, and a background change prefetching notice effect. As another kind of look-ahead, there is a reservation inside rendezvous performance suggesting or announcing the possibility that there is an operation reserve ball that will become a big win during a big win game or when variation for winning a big win is being executed.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern prefetch determination table. The variation pattern pre-reading determination table illustrated in FIG. 26 is a determination table used in pre-reading determination by the pre-reading notice control means 223, and the variation of each variation determined using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25 etc. A look-ahead type (A to D) is selected based on the pattern.

According to FIG. 26, prefetching type A (non-prefetching) is a variation pattern that is not subject to prefetching (according to FIG. 25, variation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3, PH5-1, PH5-2) is selected from When the look-ahead type A is selected, the look-ahead effect for the change is not executed.

Here, the selection rate of non-reach A, which is excluded from the prefetch target in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of FIG. 750/1000, which matches the selection rate of the prefetch type A in FIG. That is, in this example, when the variation pattern of non-reach A is determined in the normal time (first special symbol), the look-ahead effect for the variation is not always executed, and all the look-ahead determination results are ID=0. In addition, in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of FIG. 25, only the non-reach A is set so that the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern fluctuates depending on the number of reservations. From this, in this example, it can be said that all the prefetch determination results are ID=0 in the range of the random number value in which the variation pattern whose selection rate depends on the number of reservations is selected.

Prefetching type B (weak prefetching) is selected from non-reach (variation patterns PH1-4, PH1-5) for prefetching at normal time, or a variation pattern determined as N reach (variation pattern PH6) at probability variation. be. When the look-ahead type B is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect with a low degree of expectation is executed targeting the change.

Prefetching type C (middle prefetching) is selected from the variation pattern determined as N reach (variation pattern PH2) at normal time, or N reach B or SP reach B (variation pattern PH6, PH7) at probability variation. When the look-ahead type C is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a medium degree of expectation is executed targeting the change.

The lookahead type D (strong lookahead) is selected from a variation pattern determined to be more than SP reach at normal time (variation patterns PH3, PH4), or SP reach D at probability variation (variation pattern PH8). When the look-ahead type D is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a high degree of expectation is executed targeting the change. It should be noted that the execution of the look-ahead effects with different expectations depending on the look-ahead types B, C, and D means that the lottery tables for the look-ahead effects are made different according to the ID of the look-ahead determination result in the main control board 100. Alternatively, it can be executed by changing the prefetch effect to a higher prefetch effect than the prefetch effect that is won with respect to the result of using the same table.

In the above example, the variation pattern look-ahead determination table in FIG. 26 is shown as a common table for normal time and probability variable time, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and for normal time and probability variable time , different tables may be prepared, and different tables may be prepared for the first special design and for the second special design. Furthermore, a table may be prepared for prefetching the variation addition pattern, which will be described later.

The performance mode control means 221 controls the transition of the performance mode based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100 so as to match the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed by the main control board 100 side. Run. In this embodiment, the three types of production modes include a normal production mode α, a variable probability production mode β, and a special production mode γ, and the variation pattern of the special symbols instructed from the main control board 100 is the same. Also, the variation production patterns (details will be described later) that specify the specific contents of the symbol variation production are set to be different for each production mode. The effect display device 70 displays an effect mode notification image corresponding to the effect mode currently being stayed (in this embodiment, a background image serving as a back display of a decorative pattern), and this background image is displayed for each effect mode. Since they are set to be different from each other, the player can recognize which presentation mode he is currently staying in from the type of background image.

Each production mode will be outlined. First, the normal effect mode α is set when the low-probability normal variation state α is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and the “normal background” is displayed as the background image. . The variable probability effect mode β is set when the high probability shortened variable state β is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and the “variable probability background” is displayed as the background image. The special effect mode γ is set when the high-probability special variation state γ is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. This special production mode stays for a period of four times (limited period) immediately after the end of the special game, and when this limited period is exceeded, it transitions to the variable probability production mode β. When the suspension inner renzou effect occurs during the special game, a "special background" is displayed as the background image. On the other hand, when the suspension internal rendezvous performance does not occur during the special game, that is, when the continuous variation performance is not executed, the ``probability variation background'' common to the probability variation performance mode is displayed as the background image.

The decorative design determination means 224 determines the final combination of decorative design stop designs (left design, middle design, Right pattern) will be determined by lottery. In the present embodiment, three symbol rows including multiple types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative pattern is formed by, for example, identification elements consisting of numbers or letters. In this embodiment, a total of 10 types, such as the numbers "1" to "9" and the letter "S", are set as identification elements. Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "8" → "9" → "S" according to the arrangement of the pattern row, in the left display area, the middle display area and the right display area. Each is cyclically displayed in the display area.

The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when determining a combination of decorative symbol stop symbols (also referred to as "stop symbol patterns") by lottery. The plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big wins, a stop symbol pattern table for small wins, a stop symbol pattern table for ready-to-win losses, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach to lose. A stop pattern of the decorative pattern is formed as a combination of three patterns, and includes a ``stop pattern indicating a big win (big hit pattern)'' and a ``stop pattern indicating a loss (lost pattern)''. A jackpot pattern indicating a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered patterns are aligned. A jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2, 2, 2") in which three patterns of the same even number are aligned. A winning pattern is a combination of stop patterns (for example, "1, 3, 8") in which at least one of the three patterns is a pattern with a number different from the other numbers. Here, out of the winning symbols, the reach-losing symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbols are shifted back and forth by several frames while the left and right symbols match. Become. In addition, in the case of a "stop symbol indicating a small win (small winning symbol)" or a 2R big winning symbol even if it is a big winning symbol, it becomes a combination of a predetermined stop mode such as "3, 5, 7", for example. Sometimes. In this embodiment, "S.S.S" is provided as a special jackpot symbol for deterministically informing of the reservation. When it is decided to execute the reservation internal rendezvous production, the decoration pattern determination means 224 selects the rendezvous production pattern PA2, the normal jackpot pattern ("3.3.3" etc.). is replaced with a special jackpot pattern (“S.S.S”).

The variation performance determination means 225 determines a variation process (performance process) from the start to stop of variation in the variable display of decorative symbols based on information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. Decide the performance pattern. In this embodiment, as the pattern variation effect (ready-to-win effect) that is performed after the ready-to-win display, a ready-to-win effect (normal reach effect) with simple effect content and a reach effect (super reach effect) in which the effect content develops in the middle are included. . The variable effect determination means 225 holds a plurality of types of variable effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variable effect pattern. ) is selected. In the fluctuation production pattern table, the fluctuation production pattern random number value and the fluctuation production pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the fluctuation pattern lottery of the special symbols (that is, the reach type). Here, on the side of the main control board 100, the basic pattern of pattern variation (for example, "Normal Reach A", "Super Reach A", etc.) is determined as the variation pattern, while on the side of the effect control board 200, the variation effect pattern is determined. Based on the basic patterns, detailed pattern variation patterns (for example, "Normal Reach A1, A2, A3...", "Super Reach A1, A2, A3...", etc.) are determined, which define in detail the scenario of the effect display process. In this way, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, that is, the scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the end of the variation of the decorative symbols is defined in the variable performance pattern of the decorative symbols. The timing for generating the advance notice effect in each stage is also stipulated as a time schedule. The stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variable effect pattern. In this embodiment, as a general rule, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol→right symbol→middle symbol. However, if it is a variable performance pattern with a short variable time, the left design, middle design, and right design are stopped almost simultaneously, and if it is a specific variation performance pattern, the left design → middle design → right design in order. It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the order of stopping according to the above principle (left symbol→right symbol→middle symbol), the degree of expectation for big hit tends to be relatively high.

The notice effect determination means 226 decides a notice effect pattern that defines the content of the notice effect to be executed at each stage of the variation process of the decorative symbols according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern described above. The notice performance pattern includes a performance pattern for temporarily or stepwise image display of a specific character image, animation, etc., a performance pattern for outputting a specific sound, a performance pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The advance notice effect is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative pattern, and suggests in advance that the degree of reliability of the big win that the pattern fluctuation is stopped in the big win mode is high. The advance notice effect includes the advance notice effect executed before the ready-to-win state occurs (including when the ready-to-win state occurs) and the advance notice effect to be executed after the ready-to-win state occurs in the variation process of the decorative pattern. Each notice effect has a different hit reliability, and basically, the notice effect that is displayed after the occurrence of the reach is relatively more reliable than the notice effect that is displayed before the occurrence of the reach. getting higher. The notice effect determination means 226 holds a notice effect pattern table for each type of notice effect to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern, and the table corresponds to the kind of the notice effect that occurs according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. Select a notice production pattern table. The notice effect determination means 226 refers to the notice effect pattern table selected above, and based on the notice effect pattern random number value acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, selects a plurality of types of notice effect patterns from among a plurality of types of notice effect patterns by lottery. Choose one. The types of specific notice effect patterns include comment notice effect pattern, background notice effect pattern, SU (step-up) notice effect pattern, group notice effect pattern, cut-in notice effect pattern, character movable notice effect pattern, etc. are available. This advance notice effect is basically carried out by executing one or a plurality of advance notice effects in accordance with the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 70. - 特許庁Therefore, even if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed by the same variable performance pattern, it is possible to generate various performance modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice performances.

The big-hit performance determining means 227 determines the contents of the big-hit performance (big-hit performance pattern) for notifying that the special game is in progress. The jackpot effect includes a start demonstration effect for informing the start of the special game, a round effect for informing that the round game is in progress, and an end demonstration effect for informing the end of the special game. When a jackpot start demonstration command is received from the main control board 100, the jackpot production determination means 227 determines a jackpot production pattern (start demonstration production pattern, round production pattern, etc.) based on information such as the jackpot type stored in the production control information storage means 260. pattern, end demonstration effect pattern). In this big win performance pattern, a big win start demonstration performance time, a round performance time (a performance time corresponding to the opening pattern of the big prize winning port 64) and a big win end demonstration performance time are set according to the big win type, and the A series of production contents are set along the time axis. A big win performance determining means 227 executes a start demonstration performance in response to receiving a big win start demonstration command from a main control board 100 according to a big win performance pattern, and executes each round performance in response to receiving a round performance designating command. Execution, and execution of the ending demonstration performance with the reception of the jackpot ending demonstration command as a trigger.

Here, in the normal jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the characters "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the special game. In the normal round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that liven up the special game are displayed. In the normal jackpot end demonstration effect, for example, the characters "jackpot end" are displayed on the screen to announce the end of the special game.

As described above, the effect control means 220 provides image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined effect contents (prefetch effect pattern, Renso effect pattern, variable effect pattern, advance notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot effect pattern, etc.). is generated and stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260.

The lamp effect control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamps, the color of light emitted, etc. according to the content of the effect set by the effect generalizing means 220 . The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamps 10 and 25 (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25). The lamp data is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91 .

The role performance control means 240 controls the driving of each movable role according to the content of the performance set by the performance generalizing means 220 . The role product effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable role product, and transmits a drive control signal (driving data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify that an error state has occurred in the game machine according to the error effect pattern. there is

The performance control information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store information on decorative symbols, information on variable performance patterns, information on advance notice performance patterns, information on control commands, and the like. It has a predetermined storage area. For example, the command storage area includes an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands for the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. includes an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands and ACK commands.

The command transmitting/receiving means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 with the reception of the strobe signal output together, and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer. ing. Specifically, the command transmitting/receiving means 270 executes reception interrupt processing of the production control command in response to an interrupt triggered by the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various Acquire the production control command of The details of the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command will be described later. In addition, when the strobe signal is received, the command transmitting/receiving means 270 preferentially executes the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command over other interrupt processing.

The command transmission/reception means 270 is stored in the production control information storage means 260 in order to instruct the execution of the production contents (fluctuation production pattern information, advance notice production pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the production generalization means 220. An image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 using a serial communication method as an example. In principle, the image control commands are transmitted at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this embodiment) according to the order set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 .

Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. , the notice performance is displayed by being superimposed on the design variation performance at each stage of the variable display process. Furthermore, the command transmitting/receiving means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Processing on the main control board side>
27 to 48 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100. FIG. Operation processing on the main control board 100 side mainly includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
27, 28 and 29 are flow charts respectively showing an example of the main control side main processing executed in the main control board 100. FIG. In this main control side main process, the main control program is started after the security check of the main control CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, and the process is executed by this main control program. In addition, in the following description, the subject of each process may be omitted as appropriate.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (step S1), and access to the main control RAM 103 is permitted (step S2). Next, a vector table storing the start address of the main control program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (step S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main control CPU 101 (step S4).

Next, the main control CPU 101 confirms the operating state of the setting key switch 100q (step S5), and if the setting key switch 100q is ON (YES in step S5), confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch 400q. (Step S6). If the RAM clear switch 400q is turned on in step S6 (YES in step S6), setting change processing is executed (step S7). Details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but after the setting change process ends, the process proceeds to step S13. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is turned off in step S6 (NO in step S6), setting confirmation processing is executed (step S8). Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, but after the setting confirmation process ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

If the setting key switch 100q is off in step S5 (NO in step S5), the main control CPU 101 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch 400q (step S9). If the RAM clear switch 400q is turned on in step S9 (YES in step S9), the process proceeds to step S13 in order to perform normal RAM clear processing without changing settings. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is turned off in step S9 (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S10 without performing any special processing.

In step S10, the main control CPU 101 reads the value of the power-off information flag and determines whether or not the power-off normal information is saved (step S10).

Here, if the power-off normal information is stored, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the main control RAM 103 (step S11). It is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (step S12). The power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described later. Sum becomes "0". In this manner, it is determined at power-on whether or not the information stored in the main control RAM 103 before power-off is correctly backed up.

If the checksum is normal in step S12 (YES in step S12), the process proceeds to step S16, which will be described later, in order to restore the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal in step S12 (NO in step S12), or after the setting change process in step S7 is completed, the entire area of the main control RAM 103 to be initialized is cleared to zero ( step S13). Note that in the initialization process of step S13, a specific RAM storage area is not cleared to zero. For example, the setting values stored in the setting memory are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of step S7 are held as they are.

Next, the initialization data at power-on is set in the main control RAM 103 (step S14). Next, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamps 10 and 25, etc., a request is made for an effect control command ("effect initial command") to the effect control board 200 (step S15).

Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, the power-on normal information setting, the initial setting of various errors, and the communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are executed in order in the main control RAM 103 (step S16). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was turned on correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the power-off occurrence information is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes are transferred (step S17). The value of the special symbol game status at the time of power failure is read, and the power failure recovery process relating to the special symbol game is executed (step S18).

Next, the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are requested to transmit an effect control command ("power-off return command") at the time of power-off recovery (step S19). This power-off recovery command includes information on inspection of the communication line, operating state of special symbols, number of probability fluctuations, number of times of time saving, number of easy-to-enter states, variation pattern selection state, and error state. Command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the pattern storage number command request process, the information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power failure is read, and the effect control command including the information on the number of operation pending balls is requested ( step S20).

Next, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric accessory 622 to the state before the power was turned off (for example, the second start port 62 is opened) (step S21). Further, a return setting is performed to return the special electric accessory 642 to the state before power-off (for example, the state in which the big winning opening 64 is open) (step S22). Next, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operation state of the special symbol probability variation function at the time of power failure is set (step S23). In addition, the special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operating probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (step S24). Next, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S25). In preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 ("55H") is set (step S26).

Next, in order to determine whether a power failure has occurred, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred (step S27). If power failure has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (step S28). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value determined for each random number, it is returned to the minimum value of "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S29), the above-described interrupt prohibition processing (step S25) is returned to, and the loop processing from steps S25 to S29 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals. The processing up to S29 is repeated. If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing will be started when the interrupt is enabled in step S29. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is ON in step S27, that is, if power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to step S30 to execute the power-off processing described below.

Next, as power-off processing (steps S30 to S36), clear word 2 (“AAH”) is first set to restart the watchdog timer (step S30). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (step S31). If it is power-on normal information, power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (step S32). On the other hand, if it is not power-on normal information, power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (step S33), and the process proceeds to step S36.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the main control RAM 103 (step S34). A complement to the checksum data is calculated, and the resultant value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the main control RAM 103 (step S35). Next, the access prohibition setting of the main control RAM 103 is performed (step S36), and the process is repeatedly executed until the power is shut off.

<Setting change processing>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing. A series of processes illustrated in FIG. 30 show details of the setting change process in step S107 in FIG. 27, and are executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

According to FIG. 30, first, the main control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is normal (step S101). If the setting memory value is not normal in step S101 (NO in S101), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S102). Specifically, for example, when "1" to "6" are used as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the initial value is " 0”. After the processing of step S102, the process proceeds to step S103. On the other hand, if the setting memory value is normal in step S101 (YES in S101), the process of step S102 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the setting change state is entered. Then, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 197 (step S104).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not there is a change operation by a setting change button (for example, RAM clear switch 400q) (step S105). If there is a change operation using the setting change button (YES in step S105), the setting values displayed on the setting display section 197 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are updated (step S106). If there is no change operation using the setting change button (NO in step S105), the process of step S106 is skipped.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the setting key switch 100q is in the off state (step S107). If the setting key switch 100q remains on after the determination of NO in step S5 of FIG. 27 (NO in step S107), the process returns to step S104 to repeat the process. On the other hand, when the setting key is returned and the setting key switch 100q is turned off (YES in step S107), the setting display section 197 is extinguished so that the setting value cannot be visually recognized (hidden) (step S107). S108), return. As described above, after returning, the process of step S13 in FIG. 27 is performed.

<Setting confirmation process>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. A series of processes illustrated in FIG. 31 show in detail the setting confirmation process of step S108 in FIG. 27, and are executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

According to FIG. 31, first, the main control CPU 101 causes the setting display section 197 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory (step S111).

After that, the main control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation state of the setting key switch 100q is OFF (step S112). If the setting key switch 100q remains on after the determination of NO in step S5 of FIG. 27 (NO in step S112), the process returns to step S111 to repeat the process and continue displaying the set values. On the other hand, when the setting key is returned and the setting key switch 100q is turned off (YES in step S112), the setting display section 197 is extinguished so that the setting value cannot be visually recognized (hidden) (step S112). S113), return. As described above, after returning, the process of step S10 in FIG. 27 is performed.

Note that the gaming machine of the present embodiment has the frame opening, which is the first procedure, as a condition for transitioning to the above-described setting change processing and setting confirmation processing in order to enhance security. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 27, when it is determined that the setting key switch 100q is in the ON state (YES in step S5) in step S5, the state of the frame opening switch (door opening sensor 2p) is determined. is also confirmed, and only when the frame is in the open state (door open), the process proceeds to step S6. Even if the setting key switch 100q is in the ON state at the time of determination in step S5, if the frame is not in the open state (the door is closed), there is a suspicion of illegality or abnormality, so the setting change process (step S7) or the setting confirmation process (step S8) does not proceed to step S6, but waits until the setting key switch 100q is turned off, and when it is turned off, proceeds to step S9.

<Main control side timer interrupt processing>
Next, the relationship of each figure for explaining the main control timer interrupt processing will be explained. First, FIGS. 32 and 33 are flow charts showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 100, respectively. 34 and 35 are flow charts showing the details of the starting port monitor control process shown in FIG. 32, respectively. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process shown in FIG. 33, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are flow charts showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process shown in FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol control process shown in FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose process shown in FIG. 41 to 45 are flow charts showing the details of the special symbol variation start process, the special symbol variation process, and the special symbol stop symbol display process shown in FIG. 40, respectively. 46 to 48 are flowcharts showing details of the special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. 33, respectively.

First, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 is executed by interrupting the main processing on the main control side when a timer interrupt occurs in response to the clock pulse from the CTC circuit at regular intervals (for example, 4 ms). be. The terms "conditioning device" and "feature continuous operating device" used hereinafter refer to conceptual control devices. The "condition device" is activated when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is capable of continuously operating the "special electric accessary" a plurality of times.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main control CPU 101 (data used during the processing of the main control side main processing) are saved in the stack area of the main control RAM 103, and then the interrupt operating conditions are set. Set (step S51). Next, an interrupt operating condition set value is set in the interrupt control register (step S52). Next, clear word 2 is set (step S53).

Next, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (step S54). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by sequentially writing clear word 1 and clear word 2 to the WDT clear register of the main control CPU 101 within a preset timeout period. That is, when the main control CPU 101 is normally executing the main control program, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before timeout. Become. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Next, input processing is executed (step S55). In this input process, as various switches connected to the main control board 100, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read. That is, the first starting port switch 161, the second starting port switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the big prize winning port switch 164, the out ball detection switch 167, and the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, and the back set opening switch (not shown) , the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, and the like, and after determining their states, store the detected information.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (step S56). In this random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number that do not use the initial value random number are updated. As for the normal pattern variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (eg, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (step S57). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0". When the counter value reaches the value set as the initial value, set the initial value corresponding to the random value that the counter value has reached once at that timing as the new initial value. do.

Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (step S58). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the predetermined maximum value for each random number, it is returned to the minimum value of "0".

Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (step S59). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the game machine are subtracted and updated. In addition, the various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, a timer for controlling the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, and , Normal patterns, normal electric accessories, etc. Includes timers used for various controls.

Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (step S60). In this second starting opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting opening 62 are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the second starting opening 62 is set as the determination result.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (step S61). In this winning monitoring process, the first starting opening switch 161, the second starting opening switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the big winning opening switch 164, the general winning opening switch 166, and the out ball in the above-described input process (step S55) Based on the detection information of the detection switch 167, the game ball is subjected to switch passage inspection, and as a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, production control including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch Requests transmission of commands, etc.

Next, a prize ball control process is executed (step S62). In this prize ball control process, it is determined whether the prize is valid or invalid, and a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the prize, and payout control is performed. Received data from the board 400 is monitored to check communication with the payout control board 400 .

Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (step S63). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the gate 63 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 63, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as the operation reservation ball information, and the maximum Updating the number of operation pending balls with a limit of 4 and memorizing the random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery.

Next, normal design control processing is executed (step S64). In this normal design control process, a series of processes related to the normal design display device 175 or the normal electric accessory 622 is executed. Processing, processing during normal electric accessary product operation, normal electric accessary product operation end demonstration processing, etc. are executed. In addition, in the process during normal design fluctuation, the display pattern number data of the normal design is created (updated) in order to display the normal design in a variable display or a fixed display.

Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (step S65). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol is satisfied, the number of normal symbol operation reserved balls is digested by one, and the normal symbol is processed. Judgment of suitability, judgment of pattern, judgment of variation pattern, setting of variation time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, a start port monitoring control process is executed (step S66). In this starting port monitoring control process, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 61 and the second starting port 62 is monitored, and when it is detected that the game ball has entered, for example, the number of held balls Command requests for commands including information necessary for the performance control board 200 such as update, random number storage related to special symbol lottery, prior determination for pre-reading notice, number of stored symbols, etc. are made in order.

Next, a special symbol control process is executed (step S67). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, according to the value of the special symbol game status, for example, a special symbol variation start process (see step S420 in FIG. 40 described later) , special symbol fluctuation process (see step S430 in FIG. 40 described later) and special symbol stop symbol display process (see step S440 in FIG. 40 described later).

Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (step S68). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", as the operation process related to the special electric role product 642, the operation start and end of the special electric role product 642 are set, the large The opening time and opening times of the winning opening 64 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time reduction function, the variation pattern selection state setting, etc. are executed in order.

Next, a special winning opening effective period setting process is executed (step S69). In this big winning opening effective period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 64 are determined, and the effective period data or the invalid period data of the big winning opening 64 are set as a result of this determination.

Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (step S70). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is a first special symbol or a second special symbol operation reserved ball, the number of retained balls is digested by one, a command request for the number of symbols to be stored, and a judgment of whether the special symbol is appropriate or not. , determination of special symbols, determination of probability variation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric role product, setting of demonstration production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (step S71). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the above-described input process (step S55), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command ("error effect specifying command") including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, an entering ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (step S72). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball passing time abnormality is set, and a production control command ("error Effect designation command"), and a security signal output request for output to an external terminal.

Next, a game state display process is executed (step S73). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 642 operates continuously (regular number of rounds), the number of operation suspension balls of normal symbols and special symbols, etc. is created. Display data for displaying the error state information detected in the above-described abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, a steering wheel state signal inspection process is executed (step S74). In this steering wheel state signal inspection process, the steering wheel state signal is inspected.

Next, LED output processing is executed (step S75). In this LED output process, in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, display the number of pending balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, display an error, etc., the above-described special symbol control processing (step S85) , The display data created by the abnormality detection process (step S89), the game state display process (step S73), etc. are displayed on the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, the normal symbol display device 175, the special symbol reservation lamps 173 and 174, While outputting to the normal map holding lamp 176, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., the display of these various display devices is initialized.

Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (step S76). In this firing control signal output process, when a communication abnormality or disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality with the payout control board 400 is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to shoot the game ball. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a signal for prohibiting shooting is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit shooting of the game ball.

Next, test signal output processing is executed (step S77). In this test signal output processing, error check processing is performed after creating various test data, and as a result, when an error is detected, various test data are output to each test signal output port.

Next, solenoid output processing is executed (step S78). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate the normal electric accessory 622 and the special electric accessory 642, each An excitation signal is output to the electric accessory solenoids 123 and 124 .

Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (step S79). In this effect control command transmission process, as described above, the effect control command stored in the ring buffer designated by the pointer is selected from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 as MODE data and Each EVENT data is read out and transmitted to the effect control board 200 as will be described later.

Next, external information output processing is executed (step S80). In this external information output process, the operating state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer or a data counter via the external terminal board.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main control CPU 101 is set to an interrupt enabled state (step S81). As a result, the main-control-side timer interrupt processing is terminated, the main-control-side main processing is resumed, and the main-control-side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects power failure (supply voltage drop based on a predetermined threshold value) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power failure confirmation flag. do. After returning to the original process, the aforementioned power-off process (steps S27 to S33) is executed.

<Special symbol game processing>
Next, a series of processing related to the special symbol game in the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start port monitoring control processing (step S84), special symbol control processing (step S85), special electric auditors control processing (step S86) and special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (step S88) is applicable.

<Starting Port Monitoring Control Processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 34, it is determined whether or not the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 61 is detected (step S201). When it is detected that a game ball has entered the first starting port 61, it is determined whether or not the number of balls with the first special symbol activated is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S202).

When the number of balls with the first special symbol activated is less than 4, the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the random number for the special symbol variation pattern, , and each random number is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the order of entry (step S203). As an update of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter (step S204), and the winning check of the first start port 61 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 62 has been detected (step S205). When the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 62 is detected, it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (step S206). If the number of activated balls with the second special symbol is less than 4, the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the random number for the special symbol variation pattern are acquired as the lottery random number related to the second special symbol game. Then, each random number is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the order of winning (step S207). As an update of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter (step S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 62 is finished.

Next, whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in step S204 or step S208. (step S209). When there is an update of the number of pending balls in operation (step S209), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of pending balls in operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and stored in the main information storage means 180. command storage area (step S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the advance determination timing (step S211). When it is the preliminary determination timing (step S211), the special symbol winning random number value is read from the winning random number buffer of the reservation n storage area, and the winning or not winning preliminary determination is performed (step S212). A win-or-fail pre-judgment command including the information of this pre-judgment result (pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S213).

A special per-symbol random number value is read out from the per-symbol random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and symbol pre-determination is performed (step S214). A symbol pre-determination command including the information of this pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and variation pattern preliminary determination is performed (step S216). A variation pattern pre-determination command including the information of this pre-determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S217).

<Special Symbol Variation Start Monitoring Control Processing>
In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (step S88) shown in FIG. A fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310) is executed. In addition, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, as described above, the processing of the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as an example.

First, it is determined whether it is during a big hit or a small hit (step S301). Next, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, that is, whether the first special symbol gaming status and the second special symbol gaming status are both "00H (variation waiting)" It is determined whether or not (step S302).

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (step S303). Considering that it is established, after setting the address of the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S304), the second special symbol side special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310). That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation-reserving ball of the second special symbol, the operation-reserving ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested regardless of the presence or absence of the operation-reserving ball of the first special symbol. be. The details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38 .

On the other hand, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0", it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is "0" (step S305). Here, if the number of pending balls is not "0", it is considered that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310) on the side of the first special symbol.

In addition, when the fluctuation start conditions for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not established (steps S301, S302, S305), execution of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310) is omitted.

<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process>
In the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310), referring to the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in step S304 or step S306 described above, the current variation start Execute the target special symbol side processing. It should be noted that the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side have almost the same processing contents, so except for special cases, whether it is the processing of the first special symbol side or the processing of the second special symbol side. They are collectively described without distinguishing whether or not there is one.

First, as shown in FIG. 37, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation pending balls on the side of the special symbol that is the object of this fluctuation start (step S311). A symbol memory number command including information on the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S312). Next, access the special symbol reserved storage area on the side of the special symbol that is the target of the current fluctuation start, the special symbol per random number stored in the first reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area), the special symbol per A symbol random value and a special symbol variation pattern random value are read in order, and these random values are used for special symbol validity determination processing (step S320), symbol determination processing (step S330), and variation pattern selection processing (described later in FIG. 41). Since it is used in step S423), it is transferred to the special symbol validity determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (step S313). To update the reservation storage area, the reservation ball information stored in the reservation 2 storage area to the reservation 4 storage area is sequentially shifted to the reservation 1 storage area to the reservation 3 storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S314). .

Next, a special symbol propriety determination process is executed (step S320). In the special symbol success/failure determination process, first, a special symbol success/failure lottery table is acquired. At this time, when the game state is a special pattern probability variable state, a high probability win-fail lottery table is acquired, and when the game state is a normal state, a low probability win-fail lottery table is acquired. Next, the random number per special symbol is read out from the special symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 . A special symbol success/failure lottery table is referred to, and a special symbol success/failure determination is executed based on the special symbol per random number value. Values (big hit data “55H”, small win data “33H”, loss data “00H”) corresponding to the win/loss determination results are stored as special symbol determination flags in the main information storage means 180 .

Next, a symbol determination process is executed (step S330). In the symbol determination process, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the type of the symbol group, and the character effect number (fluctuation addition symbol information) are determined according to the result of the success/failure determination. The stop pattern of the special pattern determined this time, the type of pattern group, and the character effect number are stored in the pattern storage area of the main information storage means 180.例文帳に追加In addition, the character production number is the determined pattern group type (7 patterns of pattern groups A to G) and the operating state of the probability variation function of special symbols and normal symbols / 4 patterns of normal pattern probability variation ON / normal pattern probability variation OFF), one of a total of 28 patterns is determined. Incidentally, if the result of the hit/fail determination is no, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination corresponds to a small hit (step S341), and it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination corresponds to a big hit (step S342). If the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S346, and if the result of the success/failure determination is a loss, the process proceeds to step S349.

On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, whether or not to activate the special symbol probability variation function as the game state after the special game based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in step S330. is determined (step S343). That is, when the type of symbol group (jackpot type) indicates a specific symbol, it is determined to provide the probability variation function, and the probability variation operation data (ST number ) While "64H" is stored, if the type of the symbol group indicates normal symbols, it is determined not to provide the probability variation function, and the probability variation non-activated data "00H" is stored in the probability variation frequency counter. (Step S344). This determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage means 180 .

Based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in step S330, as the game state after the special game, the number of times the variation time reduction function is activated is determined (step S345), and the number of times the electric chewing support function is activated is determined. (step S346). This determination result (variation time reduction function activation frequency information (hereinafter referred to as “variation time reduction frequency information”), electric chew support function activation frequency information (hereinafter referred to as “easy entry state frequency information”)) It is stored in the time saving number storage area and the easy-ball-entering state number storage area of the corresponding main information storage means 180 .

Next, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642 is set based on the symbol group type (big hit type, small hit type) determined in step S330 (step S347). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, the specified number of rounds of the round game (10 rounds, 5 rounds, and 2 rounds in this embodiment), the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 (in this embodiment , 30 seconds, 1.8 seconds), etc.

Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330 and the current game state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game is set (step S348). In the above description, the special variation state is determined according to the big hit pattern. good too. Next, returning to the flow, based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330, a special game demonstration effect time (win start demo time and win end demo time) is set (step S349). Next, the special symbol validity determination area and the special symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the special symbol validity determination process (step S320) and the symbol determination process (step S330) are cleared (step S351). The special symbol game status of the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (waiting)" to "01H (variation start)" (step S351).

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process (step S85) shown in FIG. 39 will be described. First, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product 642 is not in operation, that is, whether or not the special electric role product game status is "00H (hit waiting state)" (step S401). Next, when the special electric accessory 642 is not in operation (step S401), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (step S402).

When the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)", in order to execute the process related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol control table (addresses and RAM storage of various tables used in subsequent processes Area address) is set (step S403), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol gaming status is "00H (waiting)", in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol, the address of the first special symbol control table (various table used in subsequent processes and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S404), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410).

In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing described below, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above step S403 or step S404, special to be the target of this variation The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, is it the processing on the first special symbol side? , It will be explained collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the second special symbol side. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing will be described later.

<Special symbol control general processing>
In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410) shown in FIG. 40, branch processing (step S411 to step S414) is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be the target of this variation is not 0 (step S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (step S411), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (step S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H", the process proceeds to special symbol variation start processing (step S420). The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when the special symbol game status is not "01H" in step S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (fluctuating)" (step S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H", the process proceeds to special symbol fluctuation process (step S430). The details of this special symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol game status is not "02H" in step S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol display)" (step S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H", the process proceeds to special symbol stop symbol display process (step S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Special symbol fluctuation start processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 41, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the lottery, the winning symbols, the number of reservations, the type of special symbols, the variation pattern selection state, etc. (step S421). Next, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (step S422). With reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value (step S423).

Next, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time is set (step S424). As a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, the fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 155 (step S425), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (step S426). As the variation start command, a variation pattern specification command and a symbol specification command are generated in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, and are stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.例文帳に追加

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (step S427). The special symbol game status is changed from "01H (change start)" to "02H (change)" (step S428).

<Process during special symbol fluctuation>
First, as shown in FIG. 42, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed in order to perform variable display of special symbols (step S431). In this display pattern number switching process, the display pattern number data of the special symbol is updated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in the LED output process (step S76) in order to display the special symbol in a variable display or a fixed display, and a predetermined At each switching time, a specific display portion blinks in the special symbol display device during the variable display, or individual LEDs of the display portion sequentially light up to indicate that the special symbol display is in progress.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (step S432). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends, the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 is set (step S433). Next, a variation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbols is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S434).

Next, "125" which is the data corresponding to 500 ms is stored as the fixed display time in the special symbol game timer (step S435). It should be noted that the "determined display time" is the time during which the stop symbol is definitely stopped and displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol game status is changed from "02H (fluctuation)" to "03H (stop symbol display)" (step S436).

<Processing during special symbol stop symbol display>
First, as shown in FIG. 43, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (step S441 ). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol is over, the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying the stopped symbol)" to "00H (waiting)" (step S442).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data "55H" (step S443). When the success/failure determination data is the big hit data, operation stop of the special symbol probability variation function (step S444), operation stop of the special symbol variation time reduction function (step S445), operation stop of the electric chew support function (step S446) , in order.

Next, as a special game start demonstration setting process, the start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (jackpot start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (step S447). Next, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (step S448). The special electric role product game status is changed from "00H (hit waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (step S449). "00H" is set to clear the content of the success/failure determination flag (step S450).

On the other hand, when the success/failure determination data is not big hit data (step S443), it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (step S451). As shown in FIG. 44, when the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (step S451), the probability variation frequency counter of the main information storage means 180 is set to 1 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time. Subtract (step S452). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero, the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (step S454). On the other hand, if the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero, step S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (step S455). When the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time (step S456). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving number counter is zero (step S457). When the time saving frequency counter is zero, the operation of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is stopped, assuming that the number of times the special symbol working time saving state has ended has been reached (step S458). On the other hand, when the time saving number counter after the subtraction is not zero, step S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chewing support function is in operation (step S459). If the electric chew support function is in operation, the number of easy-to-enter ball states counter of the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). Next, it is determined whether or not the easy-ball-entering state count counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-ball-entering state number counter is zero, the number of times the easy-ball-entering state ends has been reached, and the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (step S462). On the other hand, if the easy-ball-entering state count counter after subtraction is not zero, step S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S463.

Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (step S463). The variation pattern selection state is updated (step S464). Specifically, by referring to the variation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset end count. If it has reached, it switches to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, the production control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in steps S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this command of the main information storage means 180 Store in the storage area (step S465). Incidentally, on the side of the effect control board 200, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of the game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (step S466). When the small winning data is stored, as a small winning game start demonstration setting process, the start demonstration display time is set, and a production control command (small winning start demonstration command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration production is generated. (Step S467). Next, the special electric auditors game status is changed from "00H (hit waiting state)" to "02H (small hit game)" (step S468). "00H" is set in order to clear the contents of the validity determination flag (step S469).

On the other hand, when the small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag, ie, when the deviation data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, the execution of steps S467 to S469 is omitted. The reason why the processing for clearing the contents of the flag is not performed when the special symbol determination flag is lost data is that "00H" is originally stored as lost data.

<Special electric accessory control processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product game status is "01H (special game: big hit)" (step S501). When the special electric role product game status is "01H", the special game process is executed in subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is in operation (step S502). If the special electric accessory 642 is not operating, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the operation of the special electric accessory 642 (step S503). The activation start time of the special electric accessory 642 is the timing at which the special electric accessory 642 starts to operate in each round game.

If it is time to start the operation of the special electric accessory 642, an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S504). ). On the side of the effect control board 200, based on the information of this round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds), a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed. The operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started (step S505), and the processing of steps S506 to S510 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 642.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 642, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of game balls entered the big winning hole 64 (step S506), and the operating time (opening time) of the special electric accessory 642 is determined. ) has elapsed (step S507). At this time, when the maximum number of game balls enter the big winning hole 64 or when the operation time of the special electric accessory 642 has passed, the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is stopped (step S508). It is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (step S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds, 1 is added to the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642 (step S510).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642 has reached the specified number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S511 shown in FIG. , generates an effect control command (jackpot end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration effect (step S511).

Next, the probability variation frequency information set in step S344 is stored in the probability variation frequency counter (step S512). The variable time reduction frequency information set in step S345 is stored in the time reduction frequency counter (step S513). The easy-ball-entering state count information set in step S346 is stored in the easy-ball-entering state count counter (step S514).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation frequency information stored in the probability variation frequency counter is probability variation function data ("64H") by referring to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in step S343. (step S515). When the probability variation frequency information is the probability variation function data, the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is started (step S516). On the other hand, if the probability variation frequency information is not probability variation functional data (NO in step S515), execution of step S516 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable time reduction frequency information stored in the time reduction counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (step S517). If it is the variable time shortening function operation data, the operation of the special symbol variable time shortening function is started (step S518). On the other hand, if it is not the variable time reduction function actuation data, the execution of step S518 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether or not the easy-ball-entering state number information stored in the easy-ball-entering state number counter is electric chew support function activation data (data other than "00H") (step S519). If it is the electric chewing support function activation data, the electric chewing support function is started to operate (steps S520 to S522). That is, the start of operation of the normal symbol probability variation function (step S520), the start of operation of the normal symbol variation time reduction function (step S521), the start of operation of the normal electric accessory 622 open extension function (step S522), in this order. Run. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chewing support function activation data, the execution of steps S520 to S522 is omitted.

Next, it switches to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 (step S523). Next, a production control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in the above-described steps S512 to S523 is generated, and the main information storage means 180 command storage area (step S524). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of this game state specifying command. The special electric role product game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (step S525).

On the other hand, if the special electric role product game status is not "01H" (step S501), the process proceeds to step S530, and whether the special electric role product game status is "02H (special game: small winning game)" (step S530). When the special electric auditors game status is "02H", the small winning game process is executed in the subsequent process.

In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is in operation (step S531). If the special electric accessory 642 is not operating, the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started (step S532). On the other hand, if the special electric accessory 642 is in operation, the execution of step S532 is omitted.

Next, as processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of game balls entered the big winning hole 64 (step S533), and the operation time of the special electric accessory 642 is determined. It is determined whether or not the (opening time) has elapsed (step S534). At this time, when the maximum number of game balls enter the big winning hole 64 or when the operation time of the special electric accessory 642 has passed, the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is stopped (step S535).

Next, as end demonstration setting processing for the small winning game, the end demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (small winning end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (step S536). Next, it switches to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 (step S537). Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in step S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. (Step S538). This game state specification command is used, for example, to determine the shift timing of the performance mode and to specify the destination performance mode on the performance control board 200 side. The special electric role product game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (step S539).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57, the procedure of processing on the effect control board 200 side will be described. In addition, below, although the production|presentation control program is mainly a subject, the subject is abbreviate|omitted suitably and is described. The processing on the production control board 200 side includes reset start processing (including production control side main processing) that is executed when the production control CPU 201 is reset such as after turning on the power, and production control side timer interrupt that is started at regular intervals. Processing, production control command reception interrupt processing that is executed upon receipt of a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and startup triggered by the arrival of a predetermined generation time specified in the time schedule of the variable production pattern and a transmission interrupt process for an image control command that is activated at regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur simultaneously. In this embodiment, "reset start processing by power reset (Fig. 49): top priority", "reset start processing by various abnormalities (Fig. 49): top priority" → "effect control command reception interrupt processing (Fig. 57) : Level 7"→"Reset start processing by WDT (runaway detection) (Fig. 49): Level 3"→"Image control command transmission interrupt processing (Fig. 50): Level 2"→"Effect control side timer interrupt processing ( Fig. 56): The priority levels are ranked in the order of "level 1" and so on. In addition, "reset start processing due to various abnormalities" is, for example, when the production control CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the production control CPU 201 attempts to access an illegal area or an illegal method, DMA (Direct Memory Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the multiple types of interrupt processing described above are exemplified, but actually there are other types of interrupt processing.

In the effect control side main process, basically, the process proceeds after setting to either state of prohibition of all interrupts or prohibition of interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. On top of that, when the effect control side main process is in an interrupt permission state, each interrupt process is executed by interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) while the interrupt process is being executed, in principle, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited if the interrupt process has a lower priority level than the interrupt process being executed or has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process proceeds while other interrupts of the same or lower priority level are prohibited. From each interrupt process to the effect control side main process, it returns in a state where all interrupts are permitted. The order of priority (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by the above-described register setting of the interrupt controller.

<Reset start processing>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of reset start processing of the effect control board 200. FIG. In this reset start process, reset when power is turned on, reset caused by various abnormalities, reset caused by WDT (runaway detection) After the security check of the effect control CPU 201 is performed , the program starts, and the processing from step S801 onwards is started.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (step S801). All interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (step S802).

Next, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set to a built-in register provided in the effect control CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (step S803). Furthermore, the memory area in the effect control RAM 203 is initialized (step S804). Here, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by 0 clearing. The effect control CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the effect control ROM 202 in the effect control RAM 203 .

Next, interrupts other than reception interrupt processing of the effect control command are prohibited (step S805). Next, among the various errors set in advance common to each model, a process of setting an error type to be valid for the model is executed (step S806). Further, a light-off request is made to turn all the effect lamps 10 and 25 (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25) into the light-off state (step S807). A watch dog timer is started in order to monitor runaway of production control CPU201 (step S808).

Next, the production control side main processing is executed (step S809). Details of this effect control side main process will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that when the transition to the effect control side main processing in the above-mentioned step S809, it is usually impossible to return to the reset start processing, but by any chance due to the occurrence of a program bug, etc., it has returned to this reset start processing. In this case, a transition is made to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation.

<Production control side main processing>
FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing details of the effect control side main process (step S809) shown in FIG.

First, an address for starting to check whether or not the effect control program is correctly developed in the effect control RAM 203 in the effect control side main process (the leading address where the effect control program is developed) is acquired (step S811). ). Next, all interrupts are permitted, that is, activation of various interrupt processes is permitted (step S812).

Next, a device initialization operation is executed (step S813). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the game machine is turned on (when resetting is started), and is necessary for controlling the operation of movable accessories by devices such as motors and solenoids. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the location information that becomes available. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Next, to restart the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S814). At this time, when the effect control CPU 201 is normally executing the effect program, a predetermined clear word is written in the WDT clear register of the effect control CPU 201 within a preset time-out period. is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Next, input port check processing is executed (step S815). In this input port check process, the port input/output process (step S1112) in the later-described effect control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 56) reads the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) each time an interrupt occurs. As a result of monitoring a plurality of times (for example, four times), if all the states of the input ports are "1", the signal level is changed to "1 (H level)", and the states of all the input ports are changed to "0". , the signal level is changed to "0 (L level)"; otherwise, the signal level is not changed (thereby determining the input signal).

Next, an error effect management process is executed (step S816). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). Furthermore, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (step S1120) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

Next, effect button monitoring control processing is executed (step S817). In this production button monitoring control process, when a button advance notice production is incorporated during symbol variation, the input state of the production button 15 within the operation valid time is monitored, and a plurality of preset buttons are set in advance according to the button advance notice production. The contents of the performance corresponding to the input state of the performance button 15 are determined from the contents of the performance. Note that the button input operation itself by the player is monitored in the port input process (step S1112) in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and in the effect button monitoring control process, a flag that is regarded as a button valid operation, effect switching, etc. It is determined whether or not the flag for is established, and the execution control of the performance based on the pressing of the button is performed.

Next, a notice lottery management process is executed (step S818). In this advance notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the details of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the variation process of the decorative symbols along the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). (Advance production number) is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 . An image control command for specifying this notice effect number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the effect control information storage means 260 . At this time, when the character object announcement effect pattern (character object announcement effect number) is selected as the announcement effect pattern, a character object request is generated, and in the subsequent device management process (step S819), the movable accessory drive pattern is specified. In addition, in the present embodiment, all of the plurality of types of advance notice effects (prediction effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop processing efficiency is improved. In order to improve the performance, a lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes by dividing each period of occurrence of the notice performance (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the ready-to-win stage, the fluctuation stop stage, and the effective operation of the production button 15). It's becoming At that time, for the notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the decorative pattern fluctuation, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation (immediately transmit the image control command). Run.

Next, device management processing is executed (step S819). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) for various devices in the command analysis process (step S820) described later, multiple types of pattern data (lamp pattern data) stored in the effect control ROM 202 , drive pattern), the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, role announcement effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. The lamp pattern data of the effect lamps 10 and 25 store lamp data associated with each frame time (16 ms required to update an image frame once) as schedule data. In the present embodiment, one frame time corresponds to the time required for one frame drawing process when the effect display device 70 draws at approximately 60 frames per second (=approximately 60 fps). Similarly, in the driving pattern data of the movable accessory, driving data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, and the operation of the target device is started. Become. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamps 10 and 25 are extinguished, or the operation of the movable accessory is stopped. to end control of the target device.

Next, command analysis processing (step S820) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, the effect control command is read out. A performance control process corresponding to the type of the performance control command is executed. Details of this command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

During the loop processing of the production main processing of this cycle, it is determined whether or not analysis (hereinafter referred to as "command analysis") has been executed with respect to the production control command (step S821). If command analysis is being executed, the process returns to step S814 and repeats steps S814 to S821. On the other hand, if command analysis is not executed, effect lottery random number update processing is executed (step S822). In this effect lottery random number update process, the effect lottery random numbers such as the look-ahead notice lottery random number, decoration pattern random number, fluctuation effect pattern random number, and notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the details of the command analysis process (step S820) shown in FIG. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command held in the output port in the main control board 100 is taken into the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 as shown below, and the effect control command is captured and stored, an effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S831). When the game state designation command is stored, it shifts to production state transition processing (step S832). In this production state transition processing, the processing of changing the production mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command. The details of this rendering state transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pending related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S833). Here, the hold-related commands include a pattern storage number command and a pre-determination command. If this hold-related command is stored, the process proceeds to hold information management processing (step S834). In this pending information management process, the pattern memory number command or the preliminary determination command is read from the effect control information storage means 260, and the pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the preliminary determination result, and the pending display unit of the effect display device 70 (Fig. (not shown) to update the number of displayed pending images and the display mode (display color, etc.).

Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S835). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (step S836). In this variation performance content determination process, when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, the processing for starting the symbol variation performance is executed, and when the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command. executes processing for ending the symbol variation effect being executed. The details of this variable effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to the big hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S837). Here, the jackpot effect-related commands include a jackpot start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demonstration effect command. When the big hit effect related command is stored, the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination process (step S838). In this jackpot effect content determination process, processes for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect are executed. The details of this big hit effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 and FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not a small hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S839). Here, the small-hit production related commands include a small-hit start demonstration production command and a small-hit end demonstration production command. When the small hit production related command is stored, it moves to small hit production contents decision processing (step S840). In this small-hit performance content determination processing, processing for executing a small-hit start demonstration performance and a small-hit end demonstration performance is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S841). If this error effect designation command is stored, the process proceeds to error effect content determination processing (step S842). In this error effect content determination process, an error effect designation command is read out from the effect control information storage means 260, and an error effect for notifying an error state by means of image display of the effect display device 70, light emission mode of the effect lamps 10, 25, or the like. determine the pattern.

Incidentally, when the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S831, S833, S835, S837, S839, and S841, the command analysis process is terminated. In addition, the loop processing (step S814 to step S822) of the effect control side main processing is synchronized with the image display cycle (1 frame = 16 ms) of the image control CPU 301, so the command analysis processing of step S821 and the effect lottery of step S822 The random number update process is repeatedly executed, and if 16 ms is exceeded, the process returns to step S814.

<Production state transition processing>
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing details of the effect state transition process (step S832) shown in FIG.

First, the content of the game state designation command from the main control board 100 is analyzed, and information on the variation pattern selection state included in the content of this command is acquired (step S901). Next, based on the information about the variation pattern selection state acquired in the above step S901, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to shift to the production mode has arrived (step S902). When the shift opportunity of production mode has arrived, after step S903, it does the shift setting to specified production mode. In addition, as a trigger for transitioning to the production mode, in principle, it is linked with the probability fluctuation function after the end of the special game, the fluctuation time reduction function, the operation of the electric chew support function, and the transition timing of the fluctuation pattern selection state. , For example, at the end of the special game or when the number of times of termination of the variation pattern selection state is completed. In addition, the final number of times of the variation pattern selection state is the number of times related to the number of variations of the special symbol.

First, it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side is the low probability normal variation state α (step S903). When the transition destination is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α, the normal production mode Mα is set as the transition destination of the production mode (step S904). After shifting to the normal effect mode Mα, the normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S905). In the normal effect mode Mα, a normal background image representing, for example, "wilderness" is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next pattern change. On the other hand, if the transition destination is not the low probability normal fluctuation state α (step S903), it is determined whether the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high probability time saving fluctuation state β (step S906). When the transition destination is the high probability time saving variation state β, the probability variation production mode Mβ is set as the transition destination of the production mode (step S907). When shifting to this variable probability effect mode A, a variable probability background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S908). In the variable probability effect mode Mβ, a variable probability background image representing, for example, a "fortress" is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol change.

If the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is not the high probability time saving variation state β (step S906), the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability special variation state γ It is determined whether or not (step S909 ). If the transition destination is the high-probability special fluctuation state γ, the special performance mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the performance mode (step S910). Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is ON (step S911). A special continuous effect flag is a flag that is turned on when a special continuous effect is executed. When the special continuous effect flag is ON, a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S912). In the special effect mode Mγ, a special background image representing, for example, a "starry sky" is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next pattern change. On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is off, the variable probability background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S913). In the special effect mode Mγ, a variable probability background image representing, for example, a "fortress" (substantially the same background image as in the variable probability effect mode Mβ) is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next pattern change. Next, an image control command for instructing display of the effect content (background image) determined in the process is generated and stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S921). In addition, as the change of the production mode, there is also a change determined by the production control board 200 side which is not based on the game state of the main control board 100 . For example, when the normal game state (low probability/low base) is continuously performed on the main control board 100 side for a predetermined number of times, or when a prefetching lottery for executing a special effect mode is won, the power is turned on. For example, a timer value for measuring the elapsed time or the RTC circuit judges that a predetermined time has come and executes a special effect.

<Decision processing for content of fluctuation effect>
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing details of the variable effect content determination process (step S836) shown in FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a variation start command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S931). If the variation start command is stored, the contents of this variation start command (variation pattern specification command, variation additional pattern information specification command, character effect number specification command) are analyzed, and the results of the winning lottery included in the contents of this command , the pattern group, the variation pattern (variation time), the information indicating the game state, etc. are acquired (step S932). This acquired information is stored in the variable effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260 .

Next, variation effect pattern selection processing is executed (step S933). In this variable performance pattern selection process, based on the variation pattern information acquired in step S932 and the performance mode set in the performance state transition processing in step S832, a variable performance pattern table is acquired, and performance lottery random number generation means A variable performance pattern random value is acquired from 210, and one of the variable performance patterns is determined by lottery from among a plurality of types of variable performance patterns. The variable production pattern constitutes a scenario of the production display process in which the variation mode of the decoration pattern, the type and occurrence time of the ready-to-win production, the type and occurrence time of the advance notice production, etc. are specified. The variable effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variable effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 . A lamp performance number corresponding to the selected variable performance pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp performance number is set in the lamp request storage area of the performance control information storage means 260.例文帳に追加

Next, decorative design stop design selection processing is executed (step S934). In this decorative design stop design selection process, based on the design group information and variation pattern information acquired in step S932, a combination of stop designs (left design, middle design, right design) of the decoration design to be finally stopped is determined by lottery. to decide. The decorative design combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative design storage area of the performance control information storage means 260 .

Next, as an update of the look-ahead information storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, the pending ball information stored in the pending 2 storage area to the pending 4 storage area is shifted to the lower pending storage area, and the pending 4 storage area is shifted. It is cleared to zero (step S935).

Based on the effect information obtained in steps S933 to S935, an image control command (variation effect start command) required to start the variation of the decorative pattern is generated, and this image control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. Set (step S939).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation start command is not stored (step S931), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S940). When the fluctuation stop command is stored (step S940), the content of the fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and the pattern stop information included in the content of this command is acquired (step S941). An image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the variation of the decorative symbols is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S942).

<Big hit effect content determination processing>
54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the details of the big hit effect determination process (step S836) shown in FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a start demonstration command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1001). When the start demonstration command is stored, the content of the start demonstration command is analyzed, and information indicating the jackpot type and the like included in the content of this command is acquired (step S1002). This acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260 . Next, the number of consecutive homes counter for counting the number of consecutive homes is updated (step S1003). Specifically, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot (referred to as the ``initial hit''), set "1" to the consecutive game counter, and if it is a consecutive game, set the consecutive game counter to " 1” is added.

Next, a jackpot effect pattern selection process for determining the contents of the jackpot effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demo effect pattern) is executed (step S1004). In this jackpot performance pattern selection processing, a jackpot performance pattern table (not shown) is acquired, and a jackpot performance pattern random number value is acquired from a performance lottery random number generating means 210 to select one of a plurality of types of jackpot performance patterns. The production pattern is determined by lottery. The jackpot effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 . The jackpot effect pattern numbers include, for example, a start demo pattern number, a round effect pattern number and an end demo pattern number.

Next, the CPU 100 executes a reservation internal resou effect determination process (step S1005). In this pending consecutive manor effect determination processing, if there is a reservation that will be a big hit in the game state (especially probability variable game state) after the big hit is completed in the reserve that exists when the big hit game is executed, Whether or not the manor performance can be executed is determined, and when it is decided to execute the reserved manor performance, a special continuous performance flag is turned on, and the manor performance pattern is selected.

Next, big hit production replacement processing is executed (step S1006). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when the suspension inner rendezvous effect (special continuous effect) is executed, the normal start demonstration effect pattern and the normal end demo effect pattern are replaced with the special start demo effect pattern and the special end demo effect pattern. Replace. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the target of the look-ahead determination in the reserving rendezvous effect exists at the start of the special game (at the end of the variation) when the preceding ball with reserving operation becomes a big hit. It is a subsequent operation retention ball. Therefore, even if the operation reservation ball generated during the special game is a specific reservation, the reservation inner continuous resort effect determination process (step S1005) and the replacement process (step S1006) are not executed, but during the special game When a specific hold occurs during the special game, the reservation-in-reserved consecutive performance determination process and the replacement process may be executed to replace the big win performance data set at the start of the special game.

The start demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 is transferred to the start demonstration effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, and the start demonstration effect is transferred. is set (step S1007).

Next, it is determined whether or not a round effect designation command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1011). When the round effect designation command is stored (step S1007), the contents of the round effect designation command are analyzed, and information indicating the number of rounds included in the contents of this command and the number of prizes to be won to the big winning hole 64 is obtained. Acquire (step S1012). This acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260 . Next, based on the information obtained in step S1012, the round number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1013), and the big win number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1014). . In this embodiment, "14" prize balls are paid out each time a game ball enters the big winning hole 64. The number of winning balls is calculated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is ON (step S1015). The pseudo count flag is a flag that turns on when executing a pseudo count effect in which the number of rounds and the number of won prize balls in the previous special game are added to the number of rounds and the number of won prize balls in the later special game. is. If the pseudo-count flag is ON, that is, if the round effect (pseudo-count effect) in the subsequent big hit is scheduled to be executed, a round number pseudo-addition process is executed (step S1016). In this round number pseudo addition process, the number of round game executions (number of rounds: 1R to 10R) stored in the round number counter is added to the number of round game executions (number of rounds: 10R) executed in the previous special game. to add. Thereby, in the special continuous effect, the round game of the first round in the later special game is notified as the round game of the 11th round.

Next, a winning ball number pseudo addition process is executed (step S1017). In this won prize ball number pseudo addition process, the number of wins to the big prize opening in the previous special game is added to the number of prizes stored in the number of big wins counter. Thus, in the special continuous performance, the number of prize balls obtained in the later special game is notified as the total number of prize balls obtained in the previous special game and the subsequent special game.

The round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in the above steps S1004 and S1006, together with the numerical values of the round number counter and the big win number counter, are used in the rounds of the effect control information storage means 260. Transfer to the effect storage area and set the start of the round effect (step S1018).

Next, it is determined whether or not an end demonstration command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1021). When the end demonstration command is stored, the contents of the end demonstration command are analyzed and the information contained in the contents of this command is obtained (step S1022). This acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260 . Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is ON (step S1023), and it is determined whether or not to execute the suspension inner continuous effect. When the special continuous effect flag is ON, the value of the round number counter (number of rounds) and the value of the big win number counter (big win number) are temporarily stored in the big win storage area ahead of the effect control information storage means 260. Store (step S1024). This is because if the current big hit corresponds to the previous big win in the special continuous effect, the final number of rounds and the number of big wins in the previous big win will be the pseudo-addition processing (steps S1016, S1017) in the later big win effect. ), it is to be stored as record information of the previous special game. Therefore, in the pseudo-addition process in steps S1016 and S1017, the numerical values (the number of rounds and the number of big wins) stored in the future big hit storage area are added. Next, the round number counter and the big winning number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 are cleared (steps S1025, S1026).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is ON (step S1027). If the pseudo count flag is on, the pseudo count flag is turned off (step S1028). Next, it is determined whether or not the pending inner Renso effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is ON (step S1035). When the on-hold Renso effect flag is ON, the on-hold Renso effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is turned off (step S1036).

Next, in steps S1004 and S1006, the end demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 is transferred to the end demonstration effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, The start of the end demonstration effect is set (step S1037). Based on the effect information acquired in steps S1005, S1007, S1018, and S1037, an image control command required for the jackpot effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1038). .

<Production control side timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals, and is executed so as to interrupt the effect control side main process described above.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the effect control CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the effect control RAM 203, and then the processes after step S1111 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as effect control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts, are permitted (step S1111).

Next, port input/output processing is executed (step S1112). In this port input/output processing, the I/O port circuit 204 is used to execute input data input processing and output data output processing. In the input processing, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 are read and stored as input information. On the other hand, in the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the effect control information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I/O port circuit 204 .

Next, device control data output processing is executed (step S1113). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined period of time is read out from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (step S819) and set in the drive data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt period. When the drive data is set by this process, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched at each interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, a production timer update process is executed (step S1114). In this production timer update process, the values of various production timers used for production operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt cycle (for example, 1 ms). The production timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern, a timer for managing the generation timing of the advance notice production, and the like. The time schedule in the variable performance pattern is managed by this performance timer, and time management such as the driving timing of the movable accessories and the lighting timing of the performance lamps 10 and 25 is performed on the time axis. In addition, the effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (step S1113) and the lamp data update process (step S1118) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Next, button control timer update processing is executed (step S1115). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the production button 15 is updated by subtracting the interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). It should be noted that the valid operation time is the time during which the operation input of the production button 15 is valid.

Next, task control counter update processing is executed (step S1117). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the task counter value is "0" to "14", 1 is added, and if the task counter value is "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a cycle period of 16ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time. (Image CPU runaway monitoring process in step S1119), error management task (error management timer update process in step S1120), and other processes are executed. In this embodiment, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values spaced 8 ms apart from each other) are used to monitor runaway. task, and another value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25 of 16 ms. The minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25 corresponds to one frame time of an image frame, realizing synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

Next, lamp data update processing is executed (step S1118). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time period is read from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (step S819) described above and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25 . When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units, and outputs the data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. Note that this lamp data update process is a process executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating the lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117) described above (that is, at 16 ms intervals). process to be executed).

Next, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (step S1119). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 800 to 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control It determines with image control CPU301 of the board|substrate 300 running out of control, and transmits a reset signal with respect to the image control board 300 from the production|presentation control board 200. FIG. As a result, the image control board 300 executes a predetermined reset process when the image control CPU 301 is reset. Note that the toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level/L level are alternately repeated every frame time. This image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating the image monitoring task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117). .

Next, error management timer processing is executed (step S1120). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the above-described error effect management process (step S817) is subtracted and updated. This error management timer process is executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (value indicating the error management task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117). After setting all interrupts to a permitted state and restoring the contents of the saved register, the performance control side timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the original processing before the occurrence of the interrupt is returned to.

<Transmission interrupt processing for image control commands>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of image control command transmission interrupt processing. This image control command transmission interrupt process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

In this image control command transmission interruption process, first, the image control command buffer of the effect control information storage means 260 is checked (step S1131). Next, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (step S1132), and it is determined whether or not an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (step S1133). Whether or not an image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, a read pointer and a write pointer. If the read pointer and write pointer match, it means that no image control command is stored. If the image control command is stored (step S1133), the image control command is read from the area indicated by the read pointer (step S1134). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit (not shown) designated as the output destination (step S1135). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (command data stored in step S1135 described above) is cleared (step S1136). Next, the read pointer is updated by adding 1 (step S1137). The transmission interrupt processing for the image command is ended, and the original processing before the interruption is returned to.

It should be noted that, from the aforementioned <game machine control configuration> up to this point, the effects have been described in the case of the mainstream liquid crystal machine, but the above description of the present embodiment is not limited to the liquid crystal machine, and other effects The present invention can also be applied to game machines equipped with display means (for example, a drum-type performance display device, etc.).

<1. Preliminary explanation about the explanation of the production>
Hereinafter, effects executed by the effect control board 200 (especially the effect control CPU 201) of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described, focusing on effects accompanied by image display on the effect display device 70. FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect display device 70 mainly displays decorative symbols that are variably displayed in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and various effects including advance notice effects. In addition to displaying the image of, hold display of the first special design and the second special design is performed.

First of all, we will give a preliminary explanation of some items necessary to explain the production.

<1-1. Decorative pattern>
In the pachinko machine 1, decoration patterns are prepared as patterns for displaying the game results indicated by the special patterns in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The decorative symbols are variably displayed on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700 ) by the decorative symbol control of the effect control board 200 while the special symbols are variably displayed by the special symbol control of the main control board 100 . The decorative patterns include at least normal decorative patterns (main decorative patterns) displayed as main patterns on the effect display device 70 when the special patterns are stopped, and at least normal decorative patterns when the normal decorative patterns are difficult for the player to visually recognize. A simple decorative pattern (sub-decorative pattern) that is displayed in a display form that is more simplified than the pattern is included. In this explanation, as an example, the main decorative pattern is composed of three patterns, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern. A game result is indicated by a mode. For example, when three symbols stop fluctuating with the same symbol, it indicates that the game result is a big win. On the other hand, the sub-decorative symbols are also composed of three symbols, and the game result is indicated by the display mode when the variation of the three symbols is stopped. different. As the combination of the stop symbols of the sub-decorative symbols, the same combination as the combination of the stop symbols of the main decorative symbols is displayed.

In addition, during the execution of a predetermined effect such as SP reach effect and telop effect (both details will be described later), the main decorative pattern is displayed in a small size (or an alternative pattern is displayed) in at least some institutions. Alternatively, the main decorative design may be hidden (or the alternative design may not be displayed), but in such a situation, the sub-decorative design is always variably displayed.

FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the display of decorative patterns and the like on the performance display device. FIG. 58 shows a specific display area of the decorative symbols and the change pending icon in the image display area 700 of the effect display device 70. As shown in FIG.

In the case of FIG. 58, three columns of display areas are provided in the vicinity of the center of the image display area 700 of the effect display device 70 as the variable display area of the main decorative pattern 710. From the left, the left pattern 711 and the middle pattern are provided. 712 and right symbol 713 are displayed. In the following description, the main decorative pattern 710 may be abbreviated as the decorative pattern 710. If the pattern is indicated by an arrow like the middle pattern 712 in FIG. 58, it means that the target pattern is changing.

Also, according to FIG. 58, a sub-decorative design 720 display area smaller than the main decorative design 710 display area is provided in the upper right corner of the image display area 700 . The sub-decorative pattern is displayed while the special pattern is fluctuating, and is displayed stopped while the special pattern is stopped. Display and stop display. By providing this sub-decorative pattern 720, even if it is desired to make the main decorative pattern 710 smaller or to hide it, it is still fluctuating (in other words, the success/failure result is not fixed). can be notified. For example, when the effect image is displayed in front of the main decorative pattern 710 in the SP reach effect (details will be described later), etc., the effect control board 200 can turn off the display of the main decorative pattern 710, The display of the sub-decorative pattern 720 is maintained. That is, it can be said that the sub-decorative design 720 is a design for guaranteeing display (for compensating the display state of the main decorative design 710).

In addition, it is preferable that the variable display of the sub-decorative pattern 720 is always continued from the start of the variable special pattern to the stop display. That is, when the main decorative pattern 710 is temporarily stopped in the middle (for example, when a special main decorative pattern 710 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped in the pattern pseudo-stop effect described later). Also, the sub-decorative pattern 720 is preferably configured so as not to temporarily stop in the middle. is not provided, and the sub-decorative pattern 720 only performs a fixed stop. Furthermore, the sub-decorative pattern 720 is provided to prevent misrecognition of a big hit in the case of a losing variation, and to prevent the player from recognizing the big win in advance in the case of a big winning variation. Even if it is a big hit variation, it is preferable to display the variation while maintaining the symbol combination that indicates a loss to the player. Specifically, for example, when the types of symbols of the sub-decorative symbols 720 are "1 to 7", the symbol combinations of the sub-decorative symbols 720 are "123" → "234" → ... → "567" → " 671"→"712"→"123"→ . . . In addition, "determined stop" means that the decorative design stops deterministically when the special design stops after the fluctuation of one special design ends (in other words, it does not change any more, and It is a stop mode in which the combination of decorative symbols does not change), and “temporary stop” and “temporary stop” refer to “fixed stop” during a single fluctuation of special symbols. At the timing, one or more decoration patterns temporarily stop with minute fluctuations.

Furthermore, when the fluctuation is started from the state where the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are fixed and stopped, the starting pattern combination (the first pattern combination immediately after the start of the fluctuation) is fixed in the main decorative pattern 710. Although the pattern combination progresses by "1" pattern from the pattern combination at the time of stop, in the sub-decorative pattern 720, the pattern combination that is the starting point is a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the pattern combination at the time of fixed stop. becomes. Specifically, for example, when both the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 are fixed and stopped at the design combination of "243", when the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 start to fluctuate, the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 The symbol combination that is the starting point of the decorative symbol 710 is "354", but the symbol combination that is the starting point of the sub-decorative symbol 720 is fixed to "123" (an example of the default value). Also, for example, when the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 start to change from a situation where both the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 are fixed and stopped at the design combination of "333", the main decorative design 710 The starting point of the pattern combination is "444", but the starting point of the sub-decorative pattern 720 is fixed to "123" (an example of the default value) as in the above example.

The decorative designs (the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720) have been described in detail above. By configuring in this way, the roles of the main decorative design 710 and the sub-decorative design can be clearly differentiated.

(1) The display area of the main decorative symbol 710 that is easily recognized by the player is larger than the display area of the sub-decorative symbol 720 for display collateral. This is a situation where the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are fixed and stopped, or immediately after the main decorative pattern 710 forms a ready-to-win state (a ready-to-reach state in a state where the SP ready-to-win effect has not been developed. For example, During normal reach), the situation is not limited to the situation where the sub decorative pattern 720 is being variably displayed, but the situation where the main decorative design 710 is displayed as a small design and the sub decorative design 720 is being variably displayed during the SP reach production. However, it is preferable to configure them in the same way.

(2) The display position of the main decorative pattern 710 is either in the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or in the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By setting different display positions according to the presence, it is possible to realize the variety of effects by the main decorative pattern 710 according to the effect mode. On the other hand, the sub decorative pattern 720 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, so regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, the same display position and By doing so, it is preferable not to impose an extra burden of development and design. Details of the effect mode will be described later.

(3) The display mode of the main decorative pattern 710 is the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By using different display modes depending on the presence, it is possible to realize a variety of effects by the main decorative pattern 710 according to the effect mode. For example, in the first production mode, the main decorative patterns 710 are composed only of numbers (main decorative patterns 710 such as "1", "2", ... , "7"), and in the second production mode, the numbers are designed. and the symbols of the ally characters are combined to form the main decorative symbols 710 (main decorative symbols such as “1”+“character a”, “2”+“character b”, . . . , “7”+“character g”). decoration pattern 710). On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, only the same display mode is used regardless of whether the mode is the first production mode or the second production mode. (For example, only numbers are used), so that it is preferable not to impose an extra burden of development and design.

(4) The display area of the main decorative pattern 710 varies (moves, becomes a small pattern, etc.) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether it is in normal reach, whether it is in SP reach, etc.). ), the production of the main decorative pattern 710 can be diversified. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, the display area should not change (do not move or become a small pattern) according to the changing situation. Therefore, it is preferable not to impose an extra burden on development and design.

(5) The main decorative pattern 710 has a variable speed, such as low speed, medium speed, high speed, and super high speed, depending on the fluctuation situation (for example, when the fluctuation starts, is in the middle of the fluctuation, is near the end of the fluctuation, etc.). By doing so, the production of the main decorative pattern 710 can be diversified. On the other hand, since the sub-decorative pattern 720 only needs to play a role of compensating the display state of the main decorative pattern 710, the fluctuation speed is not changed according to the fluctuation situation, or the number of stages in which it is variable is reduced (for example, low speed). and high speed only), so that it is preferable not to impose an extra burden of development and design.

(6) The main decorative pattern 710 is a temporary stop (temporary stop (temporary stop) during the fluctuation of the special pattern) before the final stop (stop at the timing when the special pattern stops), and a minute shake fluctuation At that time, a specific pattern of the main decorative pattern 710 other than numbers (for example, a main decorative pattern with the word "super" that foretells development to SP reach production) 710), it is possible to provide a relationship between the effect of the main decorative pattern 710 and other effects. On the other hand, the sub decorative pattern 720 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710. It is preferable not to impose a burden of development and design.

(7) The main decorative pattern 710 overlaps the display area of other notice effects (for example, a step-up effect, an icon change effect due to a look-ahead effect (details of each effect will be described later), etc.), that is, a superimposed display is performed. may In the pachinko machine 1, the superimposition display as described above is allowed in order to perform a powerful effect by using the image display area 700 of the effect display device 70 as much as possible. In order to compensate for this, it is desirable to design the display area of the sub-decorative pattern 720 so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed) the display area of the other notice effect. However, regarding the relationship with special forewarning effects that are difficult to avoid overlapping (for example, a group forewarning effect that is displayed in the entire image display area 700, a stage change effect that is a background foreshadowing effect that suggests or notifies a change in the performance stage, etc.) sets the display priority of the sub-decorative pattern 720 higher than the display priority of the special notice effect (that is, the sub-decorative pattern 720 is set to be displayed in front of the special notice effect). is preferred. In addition, a right-handed notification image (an image displayed during the high base state) is provided to the player, and the second starting port 62 (in this embodiment, the second starting port 62 is arranged in the right game area). It is desirable that the effect image prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the game area on the right side where the sub-decorative symbol 720 is arranged, so that the display area of the sub-decorative symbol 720 and the It is desirable to design so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed) with the display area of the hitting to right notification image. However, when the display area of the main decorative symbol 710 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the sub decorative symbol 720 and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimposed). In that case, the display priority of the main decorative pattern 710 is set lower than the display priority of the right-handed informing image (that is, the main decorative design 710 is set to be displayed behind the right-handed informing image). is preferred.

(8) During the special game, the main decorative symbol 710 may be displayed with only one symbol instead of a combination of three symbols. For example, when the special game is executed after the main decorative symbol 710 is fixed and stopped with the symbol combination of "777", "7" is displayed during the special game and the main decorative symbol 710 is the symbol of "222". When a special game is executed after the combinations are fixed and stopped, "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize which main decorative symbol 710 has resulted in a big hit during the special game. Also, as a modified example, a combination of main decorative symbols 710 corresponding to a high-advantage jackpot (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc. indicating a 5R or higher jackpot or a 10R jackpot). One symbol may be displayed during the special game only when is fixed and stopped. In this way, the display area for displaying the main decorative pattern 710 by one pattern during the special game is the round display area (which round the currently running special game has progressed to), which is the other display area during the special game. ), a right-handed display area (an image displayed during a special game, and a large winning opening 64 for the player (in this embodiment, the big winning opening 64 is the game on the right side) area), an area that displays an effect image that encourages you to shoot a game ball aiming at the game area on the right side where the area is located), a prize ball acquisition display area (a special game currently being executed (one time area to display the number of prize balls acquired in the special game)), accumulated number of prize balls display area (acquired in one or more special games including at least the currently running special game (acquired in Renso) It is desirable to configure it so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed display) with the area for displaying the number of winning balls). However, the highlighted display may be superimposed and displayed, and in that case, the highlighted display preferably has a higher display priority than the main decorative pattern 710 . In addition, the sub-decorative pattern 720 is preferably not displayed during the special game because the variable display is not performed during the special game, but it may be configured to be displayed during the special game. . When the sub-decorative pattern 720 is displayed during the special game, it does not overlap with the other display areas during the special game such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the winning ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative number of winning balls display area (superimposed). not displayed), and it is desirable not to highlight or superimpose.

(9) The main decorative pattern 710 can be changed (for example, moving from top to bottom in the image display area 700), or at the start of the change, immediately after a temporary stop, after reaching reach, or during a temporary stop. In the situation (1), display may be performed with a predetermined action. Predetermined motions in each of the above situations are referred to as fluctuation start motions, temporary stop motions, reach establishment motions, and swaying motions. Specifically, for example, when it becomes non-reach (for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are displayed as "624" at the time of finalization stop), the main decorative pattern 710 is the left pattern at the start of fluctuation. 711, middle symbol 712, and right symbol 713 all perform an operation such as enlarging and then start to fluctuate. ” After the symbol temporarily stops, the shaking motion is continued. After that, when the right symbol 713 temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, the “4” symbol continues the shaking motion after the temporary stop. , After that, when the middle symbol 712 temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing motion, the "2" symbol temporarily stops and performs a little shaking motion, and then at the fixed stop timing, all symbols end the action. In this case, the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not perform any of the above operations. Also, in the case of normal reach (for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are displayed as "212" at the time of fixed stop), the main decorative pattern 710 is the left pattern 711 and the middle pattern 712 at the start of fluctuation. , All the right symbols 713 perform an operation to expand and then start to change, and then when the left symbol 711 temporarily stops, after performing a jumping operation, the “2” symbol temporarily stops After that, the shaking motion is continued, and then, when the right symbol 713 is temporarily stopped, after performing a bouncing motion, after the “2” symbol is temporarily stopped, the shaking motion is continued, and then reach In order to notify that there is a certain thing, the left pattern 711 and the right pattern 713 rotate and continue the swinging motion again, and after that, when the middle pattern 712 temporarily stops, after performing a jumping motion The "1" symbol is temporarily stopped and shakes a little, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of all the symbols are terminated (the middle symbol 712 does not rotate). In this case, the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not perform any of the above operations. Also, when developing into SP reach production (for example, when the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are displayed as "232" at the time of fixed stop), the main decorative pattern 710 is the left pattern 711 at the start of fluctuation, All of the middle pattern 712 and the right pattern 713 perform an operation such that they expand and then start to change, and then when the left pattern 711 temporarily stops, after performing a jumping operation, the "2" symbol continues the shaking motion after temporarily stopping, and then, when the right symbol 713 temporarily stops, performs a bouncing motion, and after the “2” symbol temporarily stops, continues the shaking motion, and then , the left pattern 711 and the right pattern 713 rotate to notify that it is ready-to-win, and then continue the swinging motion again. (At this time, the middle pattern 712 fluctuates from top to bottom in an enlarged state, and the left and right patterns that did not overlap (or had a low overlap rate) until then After that, the normal background is changed to the ready-to-win background in order to execute the SP ready-to-win production. After that, at the fixed stop timing, all the actions of all the symbols are finished (the middle pattern 712 neither bounces nor rotates.) In this case, the sub-decorative pattern 720 does not perform any of the above actions. No. By configuring in this way, it is possible to add variety to the presentation of the main decorative pattern 710. On the other hand, the sub decorative pattern 720 only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the main decorative pattern 710. Therefore, it is preferable not to impose an extra burden on development and design by configuring it so that it does not perform any particular actions. However, after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the fluctuation stopped, the main decorative pattern 710 may be configured to perform a swinging motion, but even in this situation, the sub decorative pattern 720 By configuring in this way, it is possible to stimulate the desire to play even during the game standby (while the symbols are stopped), and the sub-decorative symbol 720 does not perform the swinging motion. In addition, when the demonstration effect is displayed, the main decorative pattern 710 is hidden, but the sub decorative pattern 72 is displayed. 0 may be configured to continue to display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure the display of what symbols are stopped while emphasizing the screen display by the demonstration effect. However, since the game is not being played during the demonstration effect, the sub-decorative pattern 720 may also be hidden. In addition, among the main decorative patterns 710, a specific pattern (for example, the "7" pattern in the middle pattern 712) is configured not to perform a predetermined action (or to have a lower probability of performing) than other patterns. You may The predetermined motion may be, for example, the above-described temporary stop motion (bouncing motion) (particularly suitable for the "7" symbol of the medium symbol 712 after the ready-to-win state is established). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of actions in a specific pattern. Note that the main decorative pattern 710 is configured by combining the number pattern and the pattern of the ally character (“1”+“character a”, “2”+“character b”, . . . , “7”+“ In the case of the main decorative pattern 710 such as "character g", the swing motion of the main decorative pattern 710 includes both the number patterns and the patterns of the ally characters. If the main decorative pattern 710 is displayed on the uppermost side and the state when it is displayed on the lowermost side during the swinging motion, the distance width between the state where the main decorative pattern 710 is displayed on the uppermost side and the state when it is displayed on the lowermost side) is different. may be realized. In such a configuration, the swinging width of the number pattern is made smaller than the swinging width of the ally character's pattern, or the number pattern does not swing and only the ally character's pattern swings. You may

Further, according to FIG. 58, the lower side of the image display area 700 is provided with a display area for displaying the current variation (also referred to as the variation) and the suspension of variation (simply referred to as suspension) of the special symbol with icons. . More specifically, it indicates that there is a change icon, which is an icon indicating that the special symbol is currently changing, and a suspension, which is a change display in which the condition for starting the change display is not satisfied at the present time. A display area is provided for displaying a pending icon, which is an icon. For the sake of simplicity, the second special symbol will be omitted and only the first special symbol will be described below. However, in practice, the second special symbol may be considered to have the same configuration as the first special symbol. According to FIG. 58, the variation icon 750 is prepared as an icon corresponding to the variation, and the hold icon 760 (individually, in order of closeness to the hold digestion) is prepared as an icon corresponding to a maximum of four variation holds of the first special symbol. , a first pending icon 761, a second pending icon 762, a third pending icon 763, and a fourth pending icon 764) are prepared. With the pending icon 760, the pending display of the first special symbol is executed in synchronization with the first special symbol pending lamp. In the low base, when the first special symbol is changing and the first special symbol is reserved, the variation icon and the reserved icon of the first special symbol can be displayed, but the second special symbol is Even if there is a suspension of the second special symbol during variation, neither the variation icon nor the suspension icon of the second special symbol is displayed. Also, in the high base, if the second special symbol is changing and the second special symbol is reserved, the variation icon and the reserved icon of the second special symbol can be displayed, but the first special symbol is Even if there is a suspension of the first special symbol during variation, neither the variation icon nor the suspension icon of the first special symbol is displayed. As a modification, for the variation icon, the variation icon of the first special symbol and the variation icon of the second special symbol are different from the suspension icon of the first special symbol and the suspension icon of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be displayed on both the base and the high base. During the SP ready-to-win effect, the variable icon and the pending icon may be hidden, or the variable icon may be displayed and the pending icon may be hidden.

Furthermore, according to FIG. 58, a display area for a pending number display 770 is provided below the sub-decorative pattern 720 in the upper right corner of the image display area 700 . The pending number display 770 displays the variable pending number of the first special symbol in a small size using a number or the like, and is displayed at least during the period in which the pending icon 760 is not displayed even though the variable pending exists. and For example, in the case of FIG. 58, the pending number display 770 is displayed as "2", which means that the variable pending number of the first special symbol is "2", and the pending icon 760 , the first pending icon 761 and the second pending icon 762 are lit (in black in the figure). Further, as described above, the actual pachinko machine 1 is provided with a display area for displaying the variable pending number of the second special symbol. Here, both the pending number display that displays the variable pending number of the first special symbol and the pending number display that displays the variable pending number of the first special symbol are displayed at the same time (for example, the variable pending number of the first special symbol The pending number display to be displayed may be displayed in red numbers, and the pending number display to display the variable pending number of the second special symbol may be displayed in blue numbers. Regarding the display of the number of reservations (display of the number of reservations of the first special design, display of the number of reservations of the second special design), even if the number of reservations is 0, it is not hidden, and "0" is displayed. be. For example, when the variable pending number of the first special symbol is "0" and the variable pending number of the second special symbol is "3", the pending number display of the first special symbol is displayed as "0", and the second special symbol is displayed as "0". The reserved number display of the 2 special symbols is displayed as "3". In addition, regarding the number of pending display, it is always displayed not only during the fluctuation of the special pattern but also during the stop of the special pattern (for example, it is always displayed regardless of whether the SP reach production is in progress, decorative accessory 781 , 782 are in operation), but it is desirable that they are hidden during execution of a special game or during execution of a demonstration effect (decorative accessories 781 and 782 are shown in FIG. 71(E), etc., and the details of its operation will be described later in the description of FIG. 71(E)). However, for the display of the number of reservations, it may be displayed even during the execution of the special game or during the execution of the demonstration effect, but in that case, during the execution of the demonstration effect, the variable reservation number of the first special symbol and Since both the variable pending number of the second special symbol is "0", the pending number display of the first special symbol and the pending number display of the second special symbol are always displayed as "0" (special During execution of the game, there is a possibility that there is a variable pending number immediately before the start of the special game, so a value other than "0" can be displayed). Also, in both the display of the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the display of the number of reservations of the second special design, there is a case where the dialogue production described later is superimposed and displayed, but the display priority is the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the display. The number display of the second special symbol is higher. Also, neither the display of the number of reserved first special symbols nor the display of the number of reserved second special symbols is superimposed on the telop effect, which will be described later.

<1-2. Characters appearing in the production>
In the description of the effects according to the present embodiment, appearance of multiple types of characters may be shown in various specific examples described below. Although the details will be described later, in a predetermined effect, depending on which character (or combination of characters) appears (also referred to simply as display) in the effect, the degree of expectation for the game result or game development varies. can be configured to suggest It should be noted that even the same character is configured so that the degree of expectation for the game result and game development differs depending on which presentation it appears. As a specific example, rather than displaying a certain character in a dialogue effect that occurs before the establishment of a ready-to-win situation, displaying a certain character in a dialogue effect that occurs after the occurrence of a ready-to-win situation is more likely to affect game results and game development. It may be configured to increase (or decrease) the degree of expectation, or correspond to a telop effect that occurs after a certain telop effect rather than displaying a certain character in response to a certain telop effect. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the game result and game development is higher (or lower) when the certain character is displayed. Therefore, when the characters are different, for example, when the character C (see FIG. 59) is displayed in the dialogue effect that occurs before the ready-to-win is established, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 20%. The expectation of a big hit is 50% when the character C is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit is 5% when the character H (see FIG. 59) is displayed in the dialogue effect occurring before the ready-to-win is established. When the degree of expectation for a big win is set to 25% when the character H is displayed in a speech performance occurring after establishment, the degree of expectation for a big win is generated before establishment of the ready-to-win even for the character H whose degree of expectation for a big win is relatively low. When comparing the degree of expectation for a big hit when the character C is displayed in the line effect and the degree of expectation for the big win when the character H is displayed in the line effect that occurs after the ready-to-win is established, the latter (character H) is the one. However, the expectation of the big win is high.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between a character that can appear in an effect and the degree of expectation of suggestion. In the case of FIG. 59, each character (character A to character Q (with missing numbers)) is basically a "self-character (ally character)" that contributes to the profit of the player in terms of development of production. , "enemy characters" that are against the interests of the player, and "other characters" that are difficult to distinguish from any of them. In addition, the degree of expectation (suggestion expectation) for the game result or game development suggested by each character when it appears in a predetermined effect (or at a predetermined timing) is "none", "low", or "medium". , “High”, and “Very High” are set. Here, "ultra-high" means a predetermined game result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a probability variable jackpot, etc.) and game development (development to a special SP reach effect, a probability variable state after a big hit game, etc.) On the other hand, it means an extremely high degree of expectation (which is the highest degree of expectation, and may be a promise of a predetermined game result or game development) in which an advantageous result can be expected with certainty. Note that "low", "medium" and "high" have lower expectations than "very high", and the order of expectations is "high", "medium" and "low". In addition, "none" does not indicate a particular degree of expectation, that is, a predetermined game result (for example, a big hit, a variable big hit, etc.) or a game development (development to a special SP reach effect, a big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. It means a lively role for livening up the production, not a role that suggests a probability change state rush after a game, but it may mean that the expectation level is even lower than "low".

The "character M" shown in FIG. 59 is a so-called mob character that does not have a specific character name, or that does not have an important meaning in production even if it does have a character name. This character M does not suggest a particular degree of expectation even if it appears, as described above, even if the effect suggests a degree of expectation for the game result or the development of the game when another character appears. It is said that Alternatively, as another example, when the character M is displayed, it may be set to suggest a relatively low degree of expectation (which may include a lower degree of expectation than when the character is not displayed).

Also, "Character P" and "Character Q" shown in FIG. , Appears in 0.5% of cases where the result of the success judgment is a big hit and the entry of the probability state is guaranteed), and the corresponding suggestion expectation is "super high" By Any kind of presentation can give the player an extremely high level of interest just by appearing.

Of course, each character shown in FIG. 59 is merely an example for the purpose of this explanation, and actually, more or less characters than the types shown in FIG. 59 may be prepared for production. Also, the classification of each character (own character, enemy character, other characters) and the correspondence relationship with the degree of expectation of suggestion may be set in various ways.

<1-3. Expectations based on character color>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in various effects (game effects) executed during a game, the color of the character string (character color) displayed on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) allows the game to be played. Different expectations can be suggested for the outcome or game development. Specifically, for example, in the following description, character colors of white, blue, yellow, green, red, purple, gold, and rainbow are used in descending order of the degree of expectation suggested. Of these, white is a commonly used character color, and may be considered not to suggest a particular degree of expectation. In addition, the rainbow color is a special character color that suggests an extremely high degree of definite expectation (certainty of a big win). In addition, the maker pattern described later may be used as the text color. It becomes the order of the character color of the rainbow.

<2. Demonstration>
The effect control board 200 can control the execution of various effects accompanied by image display on the effect display device 70 (image display area 700). If there is and control processing related to special symbol fluctuations, special games, etc. is not executed, the state in which the game ball is fired into the game area may be included). (For example, during the fluctuation of the special symbol or during the special game) and the game effect that is executed can be roughly divided. An example of the waiting production is a demonstration production. In addition, as for game effects, as described later, in addition to character effects (dialogue effects, telop effects), there are various effects such as reach effects, pattern pseudo-stop effects (pseudo continuous effects), look-ahead effects, step-up effects, etc. It is

In the demonstration production, the production button 3j etc. is held for a certain period of time (for example, 120 seconds etc.), and the firing handle 12 is not rotated for a certain period of time (for example, 120 seconds). display. The demo image is prepared according to the model of the game machine, and the theme and content may be arbitrarily determined by the manufacturer. In addition, the image data used for display on the effect display device 70 in the demonstration effect is mainly moving images, but does not necessarily include only still images or a combination of moving images and still images. not a thing

<2-1. Demonstration example>
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition before the start of the demonstration effect. In FIG. 60, the special symbol is not in the process of being changed, and no change is pending.

FIG. 60(A) shows a state immediately after the special symbols have stopped in a situation where there is no variable suspension, and in the image display area 700 shown in FIG. is displayed without fluctuation. After the state of FIG. 60(A) continues for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), or after the effect button 3j is operated, the image display area 700 is set to effect setting as shown in FIG. 60(B). adjustment screen is displayed. The effect setting adjustment screen is a screen for adjusting the setting of a predetermined function by the player's operation. As a specific example of the effect setting adjustment screen, FIG. 60 shows whether or not to automatically process the operation of the effect input device (for example, the effect button 3j or the second effect button 3k) requested by the player during the effect. An automatic operation setting (B1) to be set, a volume setting (B2) to set the volume output with the effect, and a light amount setting (B3) to set the light amount of the effect display device 70, etc. are illustrated. The display of the volume setting and volume setting adjustment screen, the light amount setting and the display of the light amount setting adjustment screen can be performed while the special symbols are fluctuating or during the execution of the special game. In addition to this, the effect setting may have a setting function and a setting screen for setting the frequency of occurrence of a specific effect. good. Specifically, the frequency of occurrence of effects related to the premium character is set to "0.1% at the time of the big hit", "10% at the time of the big hit", "100% at the time of the big hit", "100% at the time of the probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot It may be configured so that it can be set to either Note that the effect setting adjustment screen may not be automatically displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds), but may be displayed after the effect button 3j is operated. In addition, the decorative pattern 710 may include not only numbers but also characters (for example, character B may be accompanied by "7", or character H may be accompanied by "2"). In such a configuration, immediately after the fluctuation stops, the numbers and characters are stopped in a combined display mode, and neither the numbers nor the characters move even slightly, but after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed, the Alternatively, the numbers may be erased and only the characters may be displayed, and then the stop state may be maintained. The stopped state may be maintained after the display mode is changed to include the name.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses without the game ball entering the start hole from the state of FIG. 60(B), the state transitions to FIG. 60(C). When transitioning to the state of FIG. 60(C), the effect control board 200 starts displaying a prepared demonstration image (demo movie) in the image display area 700 (start of the demonstration effect). Since the execution of the demonstration effect is limited to the period during which the special symbols do not change, in the case of FIG. is also hidden. However, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured so that the display of the sub decorative pattern 720 is continued even during execution of the demonstration effect. Then, after execution of the demonstration effect, when a game ball enters the start hole or the like occurs, the effect control board 200 immediately interrupts the demonstration effect at that point, and displays the main decorative pattern in the image display area 700. 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720, etc., are started to be displayed.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing screen transitions in the first demonstration effect example. The demonstration effect illustrated in FIG. 61 introduces the theme of the pachinko machine 1 such as the worldview and characters.

In the first example of the demonstration effect, in the image display area 700, first, an image in which the character B (see FIG. 59) appears is displayed (FIG. 61(A)), and then the characters "Make a decision!" Columns are displayed (FIG. 61(B)). This character string represents the historical background of the world view of the pachinko machine 1 . After that, an image of Character B and Character I facing each other is displayed (Fig. 61(C)), and after an image of Character B punching is displayed (Fig. 61(D)), the game machine name of Pachinko machine 1 A logo (title logo) and a copyright source (publisher) are displayed (FIG. 61(E)). In this description, the game machine name of the pachinko machine 1 is tentatively referred to as "Musou Densetsu", and the copyright holder of the characters used in the pachinko machine 1 is tentatively referred to as "MUSOU Pro". Finally, the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 (maker's logo) is displayed (FIG. 61(F)), and the demonstration effect ends. After the final display of FIG. 61(F), if the game ball does not enter the start hole and the special symbols do not fluctuate, the effect control board 200 displays the final display as it is. The display may be continued, or the stop screen of the decorative pattern 710 described with reference to FIG. There are screens that maintain a stopped state after changing, screens that maintain a stopped state with numbers and characters slightly shaking, and screens that change to a display mode that combines numbers and characters and even character names and then stop. It may be a screen that maintains the state), the adjustment screen for the effect setting described in FIG. 60B may be displayed, or the demonstration effect may be repeated from the beginning.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing screen transitions in the second demonstration effect example. The demonstration effect illustrated in FIG. 62 introduces a part of the game effect that can appear during the game of the pachinko machine 1 .

In the second demonstration effect example, the title logo of the pachinko machine 1 is first displayed in the image display area 700 (FIG. 62(A)). Next, a character string "This is the point of the big win!" is displayed (Fig. 62(B)). ~ 60% effect), and furthermore, the introduction of the effect, which has a relatively high occupancy rate at the time of the big hit (the effect occurs at a rate of 60% at the time of the big hit) is started (supplementally, the premier character Such effects that do not appear easily even at the time of a big hit, such as effects that occur at a rate of 10% or less at the time of a big win, are not introduced as effects that are important to the big win because it is difficult for players to see the effects.) . Specifically, in FIG. 62(C), the demonstration image of the "first point effect" is displayed in a predetermined area within the image display area 700, and in FIG. 62(D), the demonstration image of the "second point effect" is displayed. is displayed in a predetermined area within the image display area 700 . After that, the logo (title logo) of the gaming machine name of the pachinko machine 1 and the copyright holder (publisher) are displayed (Fig. 62 (E)), and the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 (manufacturer logo) is displayed ( FIG. 62(F)), the demonstration effect ends. Note that the display contents of FIGS. 62(E) to (F) are the same as those of FIGS. Then, after the final display of FIG. 62(F), when the game ball does not enter the starting hole and the non-fluctuation state of the special symbols continues, the effect control board 200 displays the final display as it is. The display may be continued, or the stop screen of the decorative pattern 710 described with reference to FIG. There are screens that maintain a stopped state after changing, screens that maintain a stopped state with numbers and characters slightly shaking, and screens that change to a display mode that combines numbers and characters and even character names and then stop. It may be a screen that maintains the state), the adjustment screen for the effect setting described in FIG. 60B may be displayed, or the demonstration effect may be repeated from the beginning. In addition, for at least one of the introduced productions (two major productions), if it occurs in the normal state, it will not be confirmed as a big hit, but it will not be confirmed as a big hit, but if it occurs in a variable state or a short time state, the big hit will be confirmed. is preferred.

The demonstration effect executed by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the first and second examples of effect described above, and may introduce other information. Specifically, for example, a specific pattern that indicates high expectations (for example, a unique pattern commonly used by game machine manufacturers for their own game machines, the so-called “maker pattern”) good. In the pachinko machine 1, there is a possibility that the maker pattern is displayed at an arbitrary timing during the game performance. It is assumed that the degree of expectation for development (SP reach development, etc.) is high. Regarding this maker pattern, if it occurs in the normal state, the big hit is not confirmed, but the expectation of the big hit is high, and if it occurs in the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is preferable that the big hit is confirmed.

<2-2. Features of the demonstration>
Based on the above specific example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a demonstration effect configured with one or more of the following features.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a moving image without sound may be used for the demonstration effect. You can expect the effect of not mistaking the performance for the game performance. However, as in the above-mentioned specific example, in the demonstration effect, the entire process from the start of variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of variation is not displayed continuously. Since this is guaranteed, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may use moving images with sound for the demonstration effect.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the characters displayed in the demonstration effect may basically overlap with the characters that can be displayed in the game effect, and the characters displayed in the demonstration effect include: A plurality of types of characters (specifically, for example, character B, character C, and character I illustrated in FIG. 59) suggesting different expectations for game results and game development when displayed in a game presentation. can contain. However, as a matter of course, since the demonstration effect is an effect executed during non-game play, the appearance of a predetermined character in the demonstration effect does not suggest any degree of expectation. In this way, by causing a character that can indicate the degree of expectation when it appears in the game effect to appear in the demonstration effect, it is possible to expect an effect of enhancing interest when the character appears during the game.

Further, in the demonstration effect according to the present embodiment, a character that does not appear in the game effect and is displayed only in the demo effect may be prepared as the character to be displayed. In addition, a character specific to the game presentation, which is not displayed in the demonstration presentation, may be prepared. In either case, the type of character displayed in the demonstration effect is the game effect (or a specific effect of the game effect (for example, “dialogue effect” or “telop effect” described later)). It may be configured to have fewer types of characters than can be displayed. In this way, by limiting the types of characters displayed in the demonstration effect, it can be expected that the player's interest will be heightened when a character that is not displayed in the demonstration effect appears during the game.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not all characters that can be displayed in the game effect are displayed in the demonstration effect.

For example, a specific character that can be displayed in a character effect (dialogue effect, telop effect), which will be described later, can be a character that is not displayed in the demonstration effect. Although the details will be described later, in the character presentation (dialogue presentation, telop presentation), the displayed characters can be configured to indicate the level of expectation for the game result or game development. The suggested expectations are as shown in FIG. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to configure a specific character among the characters that can be displayed in such a character effect not to be displayed in the demonstration effect. Specifically, for example, a mob character (character M) that does not suggest a particular degree of expectation (or suggests a low degree of expectation) even when displayed in a character presentation may be a character that is not displayed in the demonstration presentation. The mob character is a low-value character that does not have any particular meaning even if it appears during the game. Therefore, by not displaying the mob character in the demonstration effect, it can be expected that the player will not be unnecessarily conscious of it. Also, for example, a special premier character (character P), which suggests an extremely high degree of expectation when displayed in a text effect, may be a character that is not displayed in the demo effect. Since premium characters appear very infrequently during a game, they can be expected to have the effect of heightening the player's interest in their existence by concealing them without displaying them in the demonstration effect.

Further, according to the character list illustrated in FIG. 59, character Q is also a premier character like character P, but character Q may also be a character that is not displayed in the demonstration effect. Character Q may be a character that appears in character presentation (dialogue presentation, telop presentation), but may also be a character that does not appear in character presentation (dialogue presentation, telop presentation). Set as a character that may appear in the game effect (not limited to the effect during the reach, but may include the pattern pseudo-stop effect executed before the reach is established, the look-ahead effect executed before the change, etc.) You may Further, as another configuration example, character Q may be set as a character that may appear in the dialogue presentation, but may be restricted so as not to appear in the telop presentation.

Further, in the demonstration effect according to the present embodiment, when introducing the game effect in the demonstration effect, the character string may be configured not to be displayed, or even if the character string is displayed, the character string may be displayed. It may be configured so that the "character string attached to" is not displayed. A “character string associated with a character” means a character string corresponding to an utterance of a character. In other words, in the game production or the like, the sound corresponding to the character's utterance may not be output at all, and only the character string may be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to expect the effect of leaving the enjoyment of the game without showing the entire game presentation in the demonstration presentation. On the other hand, in character effects (dialogue effects, telop effects), which will be described later, basically, when a character appears, a character string (dialogue, telop) is displayed in which the utterance of the character is converted into text. However, in the dialogue production, character utterances and character strings are displayed only in some of the dialogue productions (for example, 30 types of dialogue production out of 100 types of dialogue production), and the remaining dialogue productions (for example, , 70 types of dialogue effects out of 100 types of dialogue effects), only the character string may be displayed without the character's utterance. In addition, in the telop production, character utterances and character strings are displayed only in some telop productions (for example, 9 types of dialogue production out of 10 types of telop productions), not all telop productions, and the remaining telop productions (for example, , 1 type of telop effect out of 10 types of telop effect) may display only a character string without the character's utterance. In other words, when a telop is displayed multiple times, all telops having a storyline may be included in one type, in other words, even a telop displayed multiple times may be classified as one type).

Further, in the demonstration effect according to the present embodiment, the character string during the demonstration effect may be displayed in a standard character color (for example, white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for the game result or game development. In other words, it may be assumed that text colors such as red, maker's patterns, and rainbow colors, which indicate high expectations, are not used. Such a configuration can be expected to have the effect of preventing the demonstration effect from being misidentified as the game effect, and the effect of making the character color suggest the degree of expectation in the actual game. However, the above limitation on the character color may be excluded for character strings that display items that have little relation to the effect during the game, such as title logos and manufacturer logos.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. More specifically, the publisher may be displayed along with the title logo of the pachinko machine 1 . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, although the title logo may be displayed in the game performance executed during the variation of decorative patterns or during the jackpot game, the publisher is not displayed.

<3. Dialogue>
A dialogue effect, which is one of the game effects that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, will be described. In this embodiment, a character string is displayed on the effect display device 70 during a predetermined game period (specifically, for example, during one variation of a special symbol, during a jackpot game, etc.), and expectations for game results or game developments are displayed. Rendering that has the characteristic that the degree can be suggested by the content of the character string or the color of the characters is called a "character rendering." The character effects include dialogue effects described in this chapter and telop effects described in the next chapter.

The dialogue effect is a effect in which a character string is displayed on the effect display device 70 at a predetermined timing during a predetermined game period, and the degree of expectation for the game result or game development can be suggested by the content and character color of the character string. In the following description, the “predetermined timing” at which the dialogue effect is executed is any time between the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern 710 in the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) and the development of the SP ready-to-win effect. However, in fact, if it is a timing before a specific timing at which the telop effect described later can be executed, another game period during the game (for example, during the fluctuation of special symbols or decorative symbols, or during the big hit during a game) may be arbitrary timing.

<3-1. Example of dialogue production>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing screen transitions in the first example of dialogue effects. First, in FIG. 63A, a changing main decorative pattern 710 is displayed in the image display area 700 , and a changing sub decorative pattern 720 is displayed in the upper right of the image display area 700 . After that, in FIG. 63(B), an operation request effect appears in the image display area 700 . Here, the operation request effect is one of the game effects whose execution is controlled by the effect control board 200, and is an effect that requests the player to perform an input operation of a predetermined effect input device. The predetermined effect input device is a device that inputs input information to the effect control board 200 based on the input operation by the player. It corresponds to the production button 3k. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 63(B), the image of the production button 3j (hereinafter referred to as the PUSH button image) is displayed in duplicate in front of the main decorative pattern 710, so that the depression of the production button 3j is a game. urged by A bar-shaped image is displayed below the PUSH button image, and this represents the remaining time of the operation effective period during which the effect control board 200 accepts the pressing operation of the effect button 3j. Then, when the player pushes the effect button 3j within the valid operation period (PUSH), or when the valid operation period elapses, the process shifts to FIG. 63(C). As a modified example, if the player does not press (PUSH) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period elapses, the transition to FIG. You may

FIG. 63(C) shows the image display area 700 at the timing when the left pattern 711 of the main decorative pattern 710 is about to stop, and the dialogue effect appears at this timing. Specifically, the character M appears in the lower part of the image display area 700, and a character string (speech) of "What?" . The text color of character M's lines in FIG. 63(C) is normally white. There may be. Character M displayed in FIG. 63(C) is a character that does not have a degree of expectation of suggestion according to FIG. A production pattern may be prepared.

After FIG. 63(C), different transition destinations are shown depending on the development of the game. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the ready-to-win state by the main decorative pattern 710 may be established and may develop into the SP ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIG. 63(E), the main decorative pattern 710 In some cases, the reach state is not established, and the main decorative symbol 710 and the sub decorative symbol 720 are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (for example, "436").

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing screen transitions in the second example of dialogue production. FIGS. 64(A) and 64(B) are the same as FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B). , an operation request effect appears. Then, in FIG. 64(B), when the player presses (PUSH) the effect button 3j within the operation effective period or the operation effective period elapses, the process shifts to FIG. 64(C). As a modified example, if the player does not press (PUSH) the production button 3j within the operation valid period and the operation valid period elapses, the transition to FIG. You may In such a configuration, in FIG. 64(B), if the player does not press (PUSH) the production button 3j within the operation valid period and the operation valid period elapses, the operation shown in FIGS. ), that is, the operation request effect and the dialogue effect at subsequent timings may not be displayed.

In FIG. 64(C), at the timing when the left pattern 711 of the main decorative pattern 710 is about to stop, the dialogue effect is started. Specifically, character A appears in the lower part of the image display area 700, and a character string (speech) of "Do you want to go?" be. The text color of character A's lines in FIG. 64(C) is normally white. It may be a rainbow color that suggests a high degree of expectation, etc.).

Next, in FIG. 64(D), at the timing when only the left pattern 711 of the main decorative pattern 710 stops, the operation request effect is inserted and the PUSH button image is displayed. Triggered by the pressing operation of the effect button 3j (or the lapse of the operation effective period) in FIG. 64(D), branching occurs according to the development of the game. Specifically, when the operation request effect in FIG. 64(D) succeeds, the process transitions to FIG. 64(E), and when it fails, the process transitions to FIG. 64(G). It should be noted that success here refers to an effect result in which the character is displayed by pressing the effect button 3j, and failure refers to an effect result in which the character is not displayed even when the effect button 3j is pressed. Further, as a modification, if the player does not press (PUSH) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period elapses, the transition to FIG. may be configured to always fail without succeeding.

In FIG. 64(E), character B appears in the lower portion of the image display area 700, and a character string (speech) "Let's go!" This character B's dialogue responds to the dialogue of character A in FIG. 64(C). relatively higher than none). The text color of character B's lines in FIG. 64(E) is normally white, but other text colors suggesting expectations for game results or game developments (for example, red suggesting high expectations or extremely high expectations). It may be a rainbow color that suggests a high degree of expectation, etc.). Then, in FIG. 64(F), the ready-to-win state is established by the main decorative pattern 710, and the SP ready-to-win effect develops. On the other hand, in FIG. 64(G), the character is not displayed in the image display area 700, and the dialogue effect ends and the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are stopped and displayed in a failing mode (for example, "718").

In the second production example illustrated in FIG. 64, different characters (character A and character B) appeared at a plurality of stages of timing in the dialogue production. When suggesting the degree of expectation for the character, it may be based on a character with a higher degree of expectation for suggestion (character B in this case), or may be based on a combination of characters that appear.

<3-2. Features of dialogue direction>
Based on the above specific example, the features of the dialogue effects that can be executed by the effect control board 200 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the dialogue production according to the present embodiment does not need to be configured with all of the following features, but at least any one feature or a combination of features. All you have to do is In addition, further examples of dialogue effects will be shown as necessary.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the dialogue production, typically, a static image of a character is displayed, and dialogue corresponding to the utterance (including the content of thoughts that are not expressed in words) by the character is displayed. Displayed as a string. However, immediately after the character is displayed, a moving image animation indicating that the character has appeared (for example, an animation that gradually fades in from below) is displayed, and then the display is maintained as a static image for a certain period of time. After that, when the character is hidden (disappeared), a moving image animation indicating that the character disappears (for example, an animation in which the character gradually fades out from above and disappears) may be displayed. good. In addition, although the character strings and balloon frames are still images like the characters, a moving image animation indicating that they have appeared (for example, an animation that gradually fades in from the bottom and appears) is displayed, and then A still image is maintained for a certain period of time, and then a moving image animation indicating that it disappears (for example, an animation that gradually fades out from above and disappears) may be displayed, or the balloon frame may continue may be accompanied by animation (for example, even in a situation where the character or character string is displayed as a still image, the balloon frame is always displayed with a blinking animation). At this time, the voice corresponding to the utterance by the character may be output together. It is preferable to display characters one by one, and in either configuration, the output of the voice corresponding to the character's utterance is completed (all the voice corresponding to the character string in the dialogue production is output). It is preferable to complete the display of the character string in the dialogue rendering (complete the display of all characters from the first character to the last character of the character string) earlier than. Note that the display of the character in the dialogue production is not limited to displaying a still image representing the character for a predetermined period of time. An image display or the like that moves a still image of a character within the display area 700 can be included. A character string (speech) corresponding to an utterance by a character may be displayed along with a balloon frame or the like, or may be displayed near the still image of the character without using a balloon frame or the like. Then, as described above, it is possible to suggest different expectations for the game result or game development depending on the character color of the character string displayed in the dialogue effect. Also, the display contents of the lines do not need to correspond to all of the character's utterances, and may represent part or the gist of them. By constructing the dialogue effect as described above, the content (for example, the content of the character's utterance) related to the effect is visually displayed in a character string, and the degree of expectation for the game result or game development is highly identifiable with the character color. , it is possible to provide an effect that enhances the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the predetermined timing at which the dialogue production appears is explained as an example before the ready-to-win effect is established or before the development to the SP ready-to-win production. It is not limited to these, and may be a predetermined period during a game (predetermined game period).

Also, the dialogue effects according to the present embodiment can be combined with not only the operation request effects illustrated in FIGS. 63 and 64, but also various other types of game effects. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 200 may select an effect pattern in which a step-up effect occurs before the line effect, or the line effect may be selected during execution of the symbol pseudo stop effect (pseudo continuous effect). It may be possible to select an effect pattern in which a . Note that the step-up effect is a effect in which insertion display of the predetermined image can be executed in multiple stages, and is an effect suggesting a higher degree of expectation as the stage in which the predetermined image is displayed progresses. Specifically, as step-up effects, an image in which character M as step-up image 1 is displayed in a square frame, an image in which character A as step-up image 2 is displayed in a square frame, and step-up image 3 are displayed. A character B is displayed in a rectangular frame, a character C is displayed in a rectangular frame as a step-up image 4, and a character P is displayed in a rectangular frame as a step-up image 5. After displaying the step-up image 1 first, up to the step-up image 2, or up to the step-up images 2 to 3, or up to the step-up images 2 to 4, or up to the step-up images 2 to 5 are displayed one by one in order, and as the step-up images progress (the more step-up images are displayed), the expectation of the big win is higher (when the step-up image 5 is displayed, the big win is confirmed). It is a production that suggests Further, the details of the pattern pseudo-stop effect and the telop effect will be described later. The operation request effect is an effect that can be easily combined with the line effect, and its appearance timing (the timing at which the player is requested to perform an input operation of the effect input device such as the effect button 3j) is the same as that of the operation request effect related to the line effect. Not only at the timing of occurrence, but also before and after that, the above-mentioned step-up effect before the reach establishment, the "NEXT" pattern before the reach establishment described later, the winning display during the SP reach production, and the SP reach production. When an operation request effect is executed for the purpose of displaying a cut-in effect during a telop effect, it may be the timing of generating the operation request effect related to these effects.

In addition, in the dialogue production according to the present embodiment, not only the character color of the displayed character string, but also the displayed character (or a combination thereof) and the contents of the character string (content of the dialogue) can be used to determine the game result or game development. You may make it suggest the degree of expectation for. With this configuration, in the dialogue production, not only the character color of the displayed dialogue but also the characters that appear can have the effect of arousing the player's interest.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may have an effect pattern in which the dialogue effect is generated multiple times during a predetermined period of time during the game (for example, within the same variation). For example, in the case of the second example of the dialogue production shown in FIG. 64, between the dialogue display of character A in FIG. 64C and the dialogue display of character B in FIG. ) is being executed, it means that the dialogue effect is generated twice with the operation request effect interposed therebetween.

Then, when the dialogue effects occur multiple times during a predetermined period of time during the game, the character color indicating the degree of expectation may be changed depending on the timing at which each dialogue effect occurs (for example, before or after the ready-to-win is established). . At this time, the change pattern of the character color may be a so-called "upgrading" such as changing from "white" or "blue" with a low suggestion expectation to "red" with a high suggestion expectation, or "red". ” to “blue” or “white”. Furthermore, when the character color that suggests the degree of expectation changes from the color of relatively high expectations to the color of low expectations in the occurrence of multiple dialogue productions, it is downgraded. Make the character string displayed (or part of the character string displayed) have a different character size (larger or smaller character size) in the dialogue production before and after the . may By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to notice that there has been a change in the level of expectations, i.e., a downgrade. , it becomes easier to notice the character string, which increases the possibility of recognizing the downgrade. easier). "Character size" will be explained in detail in the next paragraph. In addition, the above configuration may be applicable even when the change pattern of "upgrading" occurs. It can be expected to have the effect of increasing the interest of people (if the character size is configured to be larger, the increase in expectations can be recognized from the size of the characters, so it will be easier to recognize the upgrade, and if the size is configured to be smaller) , the player will pay attention to the unexpectedness of the character string becoming smaller, which will increase the possibility of grasping the upgrade). Also, the contents of the lines (character strings) displayed in each line effect may be of the same type or of different types. Specifically, as dialogue effects, a production pattern A in which characters, balloon frames, and character strings are displayed (for example, a production pattern shown in FIG. 64(E)) and only characters and character strings (without balloon frames) are available. When there is a production pattern B to be displayed (for example, a production pattern shown in FIG. 67(F) to be described later), the same type is a combination of production patterns A or B, and a different type is a combination of production patterns A and B. The effect pattern A and the effect pattern B are combined. In addition, the characters (characters corresponding to the lines) displayed in each line production may be of the same type or of different types, may be the same character, or may be different characters. good too. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can enhance the performance of the dialogue production by having the production pattern in which the dialogue production is displayed multiple times as described above. Effect pattern A may be a first type of dialogue effect, which will be described later, and effect pattern B may be a second type of dialogue effect, which will be described later.

Also, the dialogue effect according to the present embodiment may be configured to have a plurality of types of effect patterns. As a plurality of types of production patterns, for example, for character strings displayed in dialogue production, at least for each character string, the character color and character size (here, the character size is the area where one character including the margin is displayed) For example, even if different characters such as "ki" and "!" In the case of image data, the size is the same, and even if characters such as "ki" and "!" are different and the sizes of the areas occupied by the characters themselves are different, "ki" is 1 centimeter. The first type of speech in which the image data is drawn in four areas and the size is different if the "!" is the image data drawn in a five centimeter square area) is unified. At least for each character string, the character color of the character string displayed in the dialogue production is unified, but the character size is the same. A partially different second type of line effect (for example, a line effect in which only the "line" in the character string "Let's go!" is larger in size than the other characters) can be mentioned. In this case, the line effects shown in FIGS. 63 and 64 correspond to the first type of line effects, and the later-described line effects shown in FIG. 65 correspond to the second type of line effects. By enriching the variations of the dialogue production in this way, the performance of the dialogue production can be enhanced.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing screen transitions in the third example of dialogue effects. According to FIG. 65, the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 that are changing are displayed in the image display area 700 (FIG. 65(A)), and then the operation request effect (PUSH button image) appears ( FIG. 65(B)). Then, in FIG. 65(C), a character string (speech) "Do you want to go?" In the lower part of the image display area 700, a character string (speech) of "Let's go!" by the character B is displayed. Then, in the next FIG. 65(E), after maintaining the display of the dialogue by character B in FIG. A display of a character string (line) is added, and in FIG.

65(C), (D) and (E), character strings (words) attached to the character are displayed. Among them, in the dialogue of character C in FIG. 65(E), only the two characters "final" have a larger character size than the other characters, and different fonts are used. "Font" here means the form of characters included in typeface data stored for computer output, and "characters in the same font" means characters in the same typeface. "Characters with different fonts" means characters of different typefaces (this description treats fonts and character sizes separately, and differences in character sizes are not related to differences in fonts). Specifically, for example, in the line "together until the end!" of character C in FIG. The fonts of the two are different, since each character in is in Gothic font. In addition, for the text color of the characters' lines in FIGS. 65(C), (D), and (E), in addition to the normal white color, colors such as red and rainbow colors having a degree of suggestion expectation may be used. However, it is assumed that the character color for each dialogue (character string) is unified. Therefore, the series of line effects shown in FIG. 65 or the line effect of FIG. 65(E) corresponds to the second type of line effects described above.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to further clarify the division between the first type and the second type in the dialogue production, for example, in the first type, the character string is displayed in the balloon frame, and in the second type, the character string is displayed in the balloon frame. , the character string is displayed without a balloon frame, and some characters to be emphasized are displayed in a larger size than other characters. Furthermore, in the second type of dialogue effect, the font may be changed for characters displayed in a different color or size than other characters.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may have an effect pattern capable of displaying a specific pattern different from the normal time at a specific portion of the display image by the dialogue effect. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with an effect pattern capable of displaying the above-mentioned specific pattern even in other game effects (for example, a step-up effect, a stage change effect suggesting or announcing a change in the effect stage, etc.), In that case, the above-mentioned specific pattern is relatively configured to be displayed finely (smaller) in the dialogue production and coarsely (larger) in other game productions (for the production stage and stage change production, described later). A typical example of the "specific pattern" is the aforementioned "manufacturer pattern". In addition, the “specific part of the display image by the dialogue effect” in which a specific pattern can be displayed in the dialogue effect is, for example, the background image of the character string display, the inside or outside of the balloon frame, or the character image corresponding to the character string display. etc. FIG. 66 shows a specific example of displaying such a specific pattern. Moreover, the specific pattern may be configured to be displayed in the telop effect, which will be described later. (For example, when characters in a character string in a telop effect have a specific pattern, it is preferable to display them very finely).

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a display example of the maker pattern. FIG. 66A is a diagram showing a display example of the maker pattern in the dialogue effect, and FIG. 66B is a diagram showing a display example of the maker pattern in the stage change effect. In FIGS. 66(A) and 66(B), as an example of the maker's pattern, a "giraffe pattern" imitating the pattern of the giraffe's epidermis is used.

FIG. 66(A) shows, as an example of the display image by the dialogue effect, the dialogues of character B and character C being displayed as character strings in their respective balloon frames. Among them, the background image (the image inside the balloon frame) of the character string "together until the end!" by the character C is displayed with the maker pattern (giraffe pattern). On the other hand, FIG. 66B shows a background stage showing the city and a walking character B as an example of a display image by a stage change effect in which the background stage changes. Among these, the maker pattern (giraffe pattern) is displayed in the part corresponding to the "road" of the background stage. Comparing FIG. 66(A) and FIG. 66(B), it can be seen that the maker's pattern is finer (smaller) in FIG. 66(A). It should be noted that even in the step-up effect described above, there may be a case where the manufacturer's pattern (giraffe pattern) is displayed. It is preferable to configure so that the pattern is displayed coarsely (largely). Furthermore, when a telop effect, which will be described later, is displayed and the character string is a giraffe pattern, it is preferable that the pattern is finer (smaller) than any other giraffe pattern in the other effects.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the above-described features related to the production patterns of the multiple types of dialogue effects and the features related to the display of a specific pattern (manufacturer's pattern) in the dialogue effects are applied to character effects in general. good too. That is, the dialogue effect may be read as a telop effect.

<3-3. Development pattern of character string display in dialogue production>
A series of character strings (speech) can be displayed in various transition patterns, not limited to the first to third production examples described above, in the dialogue production. Therefore, in the following, as examples of transition patterns of a series of character string display in dialogue production, patterns 1 to 5 of dialogue development will be exemplified, and their characteristics will be described.

FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the first to third patterns of line development. FIG. 67 shows the transition of the display image in the image display area 700. As shown in FIG.

According to FIG. 67, first, the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 that are changing are displayed (FIG. 67(A)). After that, a dialogue effect is started, and a character string (dialogue) of "Do you want to go?" When the effect does not continue from the character string display of FIG. 67(B), for example, after a predetermined fluctuation time, the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub decorative pattern 720 are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (for example, "518") (Fig. 67(C)), the effect in the variation ends. In this way, the pattern in which the development of the dialogue effect ends at the first character string display (first dialogue) is the first pattern of dialogue development. In addition, in the first pattern of line development, there may be an effect pattern in which a ready-to-win state is established, and then an SP ready-to-win effect is developed.

On the other hand, when the effect continues from the character string display of FIG. 67(B), the transition is made to FIG. 67(D). In FIG. 67D, a character B appears near the center of the image display area 700 and a character string (speech) of "Let's go!" is displayed. If the production does not continue from the character string display of FIG. E)). A pattern in which the development of the dialogue effect ends at the second character string display (the second dialogue) is the second pattern of dialogue development.

On the other hand, when the effect continues from the character string display of FIG. 67(D), the transition is made to FIG. 67(F). In FIG. 67(F), character B appears near the center of image display area 700 in a more emphasized manner than in FIGS. 67(B) and 67(D). !” is displayed. To explain the emphasized aspect more specifically, in FIG. 67(D), the character string is displayed in the balloon frame of character B, whereas in FIG. 67(F), the character string is displayed in the balloon frame of character B. Instead, the character string is displayed next to character B in a larger font size. Furthermore, in the case of FIG. 67(F), an emphasis line, which was not displayed in FIG. Then, after the character string display of FIG. 67(F) is performed, the main decorative pattern 710 becomes a ready-to-win state (in this example, a ready-to-win state is established by the “7” pattern), and the SP ready-to-win effect develops (FIG. 67 (G )). A pattern in which the development of the dialogue effect ends at the third character string display (the third dialogue) is the third pattern of dialogue development.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, there is a performance specification that the ready-to-win state with a specific symbol, in this example, the "7" symbol, has a higher expectation for a big hit than the ready-to-win state due to other symbols. You can have it. In this case, when the third pattern of line development develops into the SP reach effect, as shown in FIG. The effect can be constructed so as to increase the degree of expectation for the big win as compared with the case of reaching the ready-to-win state with two patterns. That is, it is possible to add a game feature in which the degree of expectation for a big win increases as the number of times the character string is displayed increases. In such a configuration, the ready-to-reach state due to the "7" pattern is more likely to occur in the second pattern than in the first pattern, and more likely in the third pattern than in the second pattern.

In addition, when a character string can be displayed multiple times as in the second and third patterns of dialogue development described above, basically the character color of the character string is not downgraded, and the character color is raised in the middle. occurs, after that, it is configured so that the character color beyond that is ensured. However, when a specific type of dialogue effect (for example, character string display including large-sized characters) such as the second type of dialogue effect illustrated in FIG. may be configured to occur. More specifically, for example, the character color used in character string display including large-sized characters may be limited to a specific color (for example, white, which is a normal color).

FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the fourth pattern and the fifth pattern of line development. FIG. 68 shows the transition of the displayed image in the image display area 700. As shown in FIG.

According to FIG. 68, first, the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 that are changing are displayed (FIG. 68(A)). After that, a dialogue effect is started, and as the first dialogue, a character string (dialogue) of "Do you want to go?" Furthermore, after that, an operation request effect appears, and a PUSH button image is displayed near the center of the image display area 700 (FIG. 68(C)). In FIG. 68(C), since the character string display by character A in FIG. 68(B) also remains, the operation request effect is combined with the dialogue effect. In FIG. 68(C), the main decorative design 710 is hidden by the PUSH button image, but the display state of the main decorative design 710 is compensated for by the sub decorative design 720 performing variable display.

Then, in FIG. 68(C), when the player pushes the effect button 3j within the valid operation period (PUSH) or when the valid operation period elapses, the dialogue effect transitions to the next stage. The case where the transition destination is FIG. 68(D) corresponds to the fourth pattern of speech development, and the case where the transition destination is FIG. 68(F) corresponds to the fifth pattern of speech development. As a modification, if the player does not press (PUSH) the production button 3j within the operation effective period and the operation effective period elapses, the transition to FIG. maintain).

In the case of the fourth pattern of line development, in FIG. 68(D), which transitions from FIG. 68(C), the character string display (first line) by character A in FIG. In the upper part of the area 700, a new character string display (second line) of "Let's go!" by Character B is added. After the dialogue effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect develops, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(E).

As shown by the transition examples above, the fourth pattern of line development is executed in combination with the operation request effect, and in the line effect in which the character string is displayed multiple times, the first line is displayed in a different manner. It has a feature that the second line is displayed (in other words, the next character string is displayed in a different manner from the previous character string display). Specifically, when the first line and the second line are in different aspects, the accompanying characters (speaking characters) are different, or/and the display areas of the character strings (line) are different, or/ And it means that the content of the character string (speech) is different.

On the other hand, in the case of the fifth pattern of dialogue development, in FIG. 68(F), which transitions from FIG. is maintained, a new character string display (second line) of "Let's go!" is displayed in the same balloon frame. Then, after the dialogue effect ends, the SP ready-to-win effect develops, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(G). As a modification, if the player does not press (PUSH) the production button 3j within the valid operation period and the valid operation period elapses, the display state of FIG. maintain).

As shown by the transition examples above, the fifth pattern of line development is executed in combination with the operation request effect, and in the line effect in which character strings are displayed multiple times, the content of the first line changes. , the second line is displayed (in other words, the next character string display is performed in such a manner that the previous character string display changes). Specifically, the manner in which the content of the first line changes to become the second line is that the accompanying characters (characters that speak) are the same between the first line and the second line, and the character It means that the display area of the string (speech) is common and the contents of the character strings (speech) are different.

In addition, in the fourth and fifth patterns of line development described above, the display of the PUSH button image (Fig. 68(C)) is performed after the voice output corresponding to the character string display of the first line is completed. As a general rule, if the first line is relatively long (for example, a line of 20 characters or more, "I've been waiting for this day to fight you for over 10 years!"), etc. The effect button image may be displayed before the voice output is completed. However, if the PUSH button image is displayed before the voice output corresponding to the character string display of the first line is completed, the voice output is terminated with the operation of the effect button. As a modified example, even if the PUSH button image is displayed before the voice output corresponding to the character string display of the first dialogue is completed, the voice output is not terminated by the operation of the effect button, and the second It may be executed in parallel and redundantly with the voice output corresponding to the character string display of the dialogue. As for the character string display of the second line after pressing the effect button 3j, in the case of the fourth pattern, the second line is additionally displayed while the display of the first line remains, and in the case of the fifth pattern, the second line is displayed. is switched from the display of the first line to the display of the second line.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the variable pending number exceeds a predetermined number (for example, the pending number 3) and the game result of the variation is a loss, special symbols (decorative symbols may be read as ) may be configured to be executable even in a short-variation situation in which the variation time of ) is shortened. However, when the dialogue effect is executed during the short fluctuation, the effect control board 200 preferably controls the development of the character string display. Specifically, when any one of the second to fifth patterns of line development is executed during a short change, the line production does not develop to the character string display of the second line, and the character string of the first line is displayed. Terminates until display. By performing such a control, even if the variation is short, the effect of enhancing the playability can be expected because the dialogue production can be included. Here, in the case of a short variation, the first dialogue effect may end during the character string display of the first dialogue and/or during the voice output corresponding to the character string display of the first dialogue. .

It should be noted that when the dialogue production is executed while controlling the development of the character string display during the short fluctuation, the voice output corresponding to the first dialogue is set in advance so that it will fit when it appears in the short fluctuation fluctuation time. is set.", "The voice output of the first line that does not fit in the short variation is continuously output in the next variation.", or "The voice output of the first line that cannot fit in the short variation is output with the end of the short variation. is terminated (does not follow next change)." However, in any policy, it is very preferable to configure the character string display so that the display is completed (the display is not terminated with an intermediate character and all the characters are not displayed).

<4. Telop production>
A telop effect, which is one of the game effects that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, will be described. As described above in the description of the line effect, the telop effect is a game effect that belongs to the text effect as well as the word effect.

The telop effect is a effect in which a character string is displayed on the effect display device 70 at a specific timing during a predetermined game period, and the degree of expectation for the game result or game development can be suggested by the content and character color of the character string. However, the "specific timing" is a timing later than the "predetermined timing" at which the above-described dialogue effect is executed. In the following description, the “specific timing” at which the telop effect is executed is defined as the ready-to-reach state by the decorative pattern 710 in the effect display device 70 (image display area 700), and the decorative pattern 710 is displayed after the SP ready-to-win effect is developed. Any timing until the fluctuation stops, but in fact, if the timing is later than the predetermined timing at which the dialogue effect is executed, another game period during the game (for example, special symbols or decorations It may be any timing during fluctuation of the pattern, during the jackpot game, etc.).

<4-1. Example of telop production>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of a telop effect. First, in FIG. 69(A), the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 that are changing are displayed in the image display area 700 . After that, the variable display of the main decorative pattern 710 progresses, and in FIG. 69(B), the ready-to-win state by the "7" pattern is established and develops into the SP ready-to-win effect. During this SP reach effect, a telop effect appears in FIGS. 69(C) to (E).

In the telop effect, a character string is displayed while a moving image is displayed, and when a character is displayed in the moving image, a telop (subtitle) representing the content of the character's utterance is displayed as a character string attached to the character. be. In FIG. 69(C), in the image display area 700, a friendly character, Character A, is displayed in the moving image, and a character string attached to Character A is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700. A character string (telop) is displayed. Also, from FIG. 69(C) , the main decorative design 710 is not displayed due to the display by the telop effect, but the sub decorative design 720 is continuously displayed in the upper right of the image display area 700 to display the main decorative design 710 . is compensated for.

Next, in FIG. 69(D), character I, one of the enemy characters, is displayed in a large size, and a character string "Come on!" telop) is displayed. Then, in the next FIG. 69(E), a moving image showing a confrontation between Character A and Character I is displayed, and an image display area 700 is displayed as a character string attached to Character A (or Character I). A character string (telop) saying "Let's settle things" is displayed at the bottom of the . Up to this FIG. 69(E) is the telop effect (as described above, when the telop having a story is displayed separately for each scene as shown in FIG. 69, that is, when the telop is displayed multiple times , including all the telops having storylines, is one type of telop effect, and the telop effect in each scene is a part of the one type of telop effect). In addition, when configured to have multiple types of SP reach (for example, when configured to have three types of SP reach A, SP reach B, and SP reach C in order of hit expectation), telop production by each SP reach (contents of the displayed character string, characters that appear, number of times the character string is displayed, etc.) are configured to be different.

Next, in FIG. 69(F), an operation request effect appears in the image display area 700, and a large size PUSH button image is displayed. In FIG. 69(F), the PUSH button image is displayed on almost the entire surface of the image display area 700, but the display state of the main decorative pattern 710 is compensated by the sub decorative pattern 720 as described above. Then, in FIG. 69(F), when the player presses (PUSH) the effect button 3j within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period elapses, a display is made based on the game result (big hit/loss) of the variation. The image branches to FIG. 69(G) or FIG. 69(I).

FIG. 69(G) is an example of a display image when the game result of the variation is a big win. In FIG. 69(G), an image reminiscent of the victory of character A, who is an ally character, is displayed, and after that, in FIG. 777”) is stopped. In FIG. 69(G), character A is shouting "Oyaa!", but no character string corresponding to that utterance is displayed. Also, at that time, Character A may shout the name of the special move. The name of the special move may be displayed in a large size (for example, the characters "secret technique XX!" may be displayed so as to cover the entire screen).

On the other hand, FIG. 69(I) is an example of a display image when the game result of the variation is a loss. In FIG. 69(I), an image reminiscent of the defeat of character A, who is an ally character (in other words, the victory of character I, which is an enemy character) is displayed. The sub-decorative pattern 720 is stop-displayed in a lost mode ("767" in this example). Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 69, when the game result of the variation is a big win, after an image suggesting the defeat of character A is displayed as shown in FIG. It is also possible to develop such that an image in which character A wins is displayed, and when character A wins from behind, the display transitions to the big hit result of FIG. 69(H). Note that in FIG. 69(I), character I is shouting "Fuhahaha!", but the character string for that utterance is not displayed. Also, at that time, Character I may shout the name of the special move. The name of the special move may be displayed in a large size (for example, the characters "special move XX!" may be displayed so as to cover the entire screen), but the player may be disappointed because the game is in a state of defeat. The name of the deathblow may be configured not to be displayed so as not to spur on.

The example of the telop effect shown in FIG. 69 has been described above. Although it is white, it may be another character color that suggests the level of expectation for the game result or development of the game (for example, red or rainbow color that suggests high level of expectation). Also, the characters that appear in the telop effect are not limited to character A and character I, and may be other characters shown in FIG. 59, for example. A character (or a combination thereof) appearing in the telop effect may indicate the degree of expectation for the game result or game development.

<4-2. Features of telop production>
Based on the above specific example, the features of the telop effect that can be executed by the effect control board 200 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the telop effect according to the present embodiment does not need to be configured with all of the plurality of features shown below, but at least any one feature or a combination of a plurality of features. All you have to do is

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the telop effect, typically, a moving image including a character is displayed, and a character string (specifically, A telop indicating the speech of the character in the moving image (including the content of thoughts that are not expressed in words) is displayed. A moving image displayed with this telop effect may be a movie displayed on the entire screen (or substantially the entire screen) of the image display area 700, for example. As described above, it is possible to suggest different expectations for the game result or game development depending on the character color of the character string displayed in the telop effect. By configuring the telop effect as described above, the content related to the effect (for example, the content of the character's utterance) is visually displayed in the form of subtitles, and the degree of expectation for the game result or game development is highly identifiable by the character color. , it is possible to provide an effect that enhances the amusement of the game. Here, with regard to the character color of the character strings displayed in the telop effect, for example, all the character strings of the telops after FIG. It is preferable that the character color is red rather than white, the maker pattern is higher than red, and the rainbow is higher than the maker pattern, so that the expectation of a big hit is higher. Alternatively, the character color of the telop character string may be changed during the telop presentation. For example, the character color of the telop character string in FIG. The text color of all subsequent telop character strings may be red, or the text color of the telop character string in FIG. The color may be red, and the text color of the character string of the telop in FIG. 69(E) may be the maker's pattern or rainbow.

In addition, in the telop effect according to the present embodiment, the moving image to be displayed may basically not output the sound corresponding to the character's utterance, but it may output the sound. Also, the displayed telop may be displayed in a dedicated display area (the lower side of the image display area 700 in the case of FIG. 69).

Also, the telop effect according to the present embodiment basically appears at a timing (specific timing) after the timing (predetermined timing) at which the dialogue effect appears. Specifically, after establishment of a ready-to-win situation or after development of an SP ready-to-win effect can be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, as another example of the telop effect, it may be configured such that a specific timing is provided before a predetermined timing.

Also, the telop effect according to the present embodiment can be combined with other various types of game effects. For example, FIG. 69 shows an example in which the telop effect appears during the SP ready-to-play effect. It may be configured such that the effect pattern to be displayed can be selected. In addition, in the telop effect, basically a moving image with a fixed display time (a moving image related to SP reach, for example, a moving image of 60 seconds) is displayed. In principle, an operation request effect that can affect the transition timing of the display screen cannot be combined during the telop effect. However, as also shown in FIG. 69(F), it is possible to make the operation request effect appear after the telop effect (moving image or telop display). In addition, after the operation request effect is displayed, a new telop effect may be displayed. utterance voice output), and in the event of a loss (defeat), a telop (and voice output of utterance corresponding to the telop) saying "I lost..." may be displayed, and it was configured in that way. In this case, the combination of the telop effect before displaying the operation request effect and the telop effect after displaying the operation request effect is regarded as one telop effect with a story (that is, this combination is one type of telop effect). is preferred.

In addition, in the telop effect according to the present embodiment, as in the dialogue effect, not only the character color of the displayed character string but also the displayed character (or a combination thereof) suggests the degree of expectation for the game result or game development. You may make it With such a configuration, in the telop presentation, not only the character color of the displayed telop but also the characters that appear can have the effect of arousing the player's interest. Also, the types of characters that can be displayed in the telop effect are not limited to being the same number as the types of characters that can be displayed in the dialogue effect. ) may be used.

In addition, the character string (telop) displayed in the telop effect according to the present embodiment may not be a telop (caption) of all the audio output in the telop effect, and a part of the audio output is telop. Anything is fine. Specifically, for example, in the telop production that appears during the SP reach production, voices other than the main characters' utterances (so-called voices corresponding to the utterances of the small fish characters, sound effects, and lyrics during the SP reach production) dedicated BGM, etc.) may not be displayed in character strings.

In addition, in the telop effect according to the present embodiment, when two or more (main) characters speak at the same time in a moving image, each character is divided into stages (in other words, divided into multiple stages), and the character Columns (telops) may be displayed. For example, in the case of a moving image showing a situation in which character A and character I are speaking at the same time, a telop such as "Woooo!" It may be configured to display a telop such as "Haaaa!". With this configuration, even if the display area of the telop is fixed to the exclusive area, the player can recognize the difference of the speaker, so that the player can understand the content of the moving image more deeply. can be done.

In addition, when the telop effect according to the present embodiment appears in a specific game state, the text color (for example, red) or pattern (for example, maker pattern ) is not used, and a predetermined color (for example, normal color white) may be used. In addition, the above-mentioned "specific game state" is, for example, during a jackpot game or a time-saving game period. For example, by operating the effect button 3j or a cross key (not shown), a plurality of types of songs with lyrics can be selected and played back, and the moving images are configured to differ according to the selected songs. Display of lyrics displayed in the video corresponding to each song), and display in the video that has a story (for example, a video that introduces the character A or the story about the character B) It is subtitle display of conversation by a character that is played. However, as a modified example of the above features, a character color that suggests a half-hearted expectation (for example, red) cannot be used for the text color of the telop, but a specific color that suggests an extremely high degree of expectation (such as gold, etc.) rainbow colors) may be available. For example, a video that introduces a specific story (for example, a video that is displayed when the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, or when the total number of game balls acquired during consecutive games reaches a specific value, etc.) , a special moving image that is displayed when a predetermined condition related to Renso is satisfied) is displayed during a jackpot game, the contents of the utterances of a plurality of characters that appear in the story are, for example, rainbow colors may be displayed as a telop effect.

<5. Dialogue production and telop production>
In this chapter, regarding dialogue effects and telop effects, which belong to character effects, explanations will be given on effects that combine dialogue effects and telop effects, and the characteristics of dialogue effects and telop effects will be compared.

<5-1. Combination of dialogue production and telop production>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 is capable of executing a effect pattern in which a dialogue effect and a telop effect appear during the same variation of special symbols. Here, the dialogue effect and the telop effect can suggest the degree of expectation for the game result or the game development by the character color of the character string displayed in each effect. At least have a second text color that is relatively more promising than the first text color. Then, in the above effect pattern, after a dialogue effect for displaying a character string (dialogue display) in the second character color with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the second character color is displayed with a higher degree of expectation than the second character color. This includes an effect configuration for producing a telop effect in which a character string is displayed (telop display) in a first character color with an inferior character color.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of effects in which dialogue effects and telop effects appear. First, in FIG. 70(A), the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 that are changing are displayed in the image display area 700 . After that, the variable display of the main decorative symbol 710 progresses, and in FIG. 70(B), the ready-to-win state by the "5" symbol is established, and normal ready-to-win is started. In the middle of this normal reach, a dialogue effect appears in FIG. 70(C).

In the dialogue production of FIG. 70(C), for example, character B appears in the vicinity of the center of the image display area 700 in an emphasized manner, and the character string "Let's go!" Some are displayed in large font size. Although the details will be described later, in FIG. 70(C), the character string "Let's go!" After the speech effect of FIG. 70(C) appears, it develops into, for example, an SP ready-to-win effect, and the SP ready-to-win effect is executed from FIG. 70(D) to FIG. 70(H) or FIG. 70(I).

In the SP ready-to-win effect, in FIG. 70(D), the effect name of the SP ready-to-win effect to be started (“last battle” in this example) is displayed in the entire image display area 700 . Then, in the SP reach effect, a telop effect appears in FIG. 70(E). Here, the character string of "Final Battle" may also have a plurality of character colors such as white, red, maker's pattern, and rainbow in order of expectation of big hit. Here, white is a normal color (normal color, default color), and red, maker pattern, and rainbow are colors that suggest higher expectations than white, but red, maker pattern, and rainbow If the text color is one of the following, it may be red, maker pattern, or rainbow from the start of the display of the character string "The Last Battle". The character string may be displayed in white at the start, and then suddenly changed to red, maker's pattern, or rainbow. In addition, although the number of blackened stars indicates the degree of expectation for SP reach, the number may vary depending on the type of SP reach. In addition, the same SP reach (the same SP reach effect effect name) is more likely to be used when the text color of the character string of the effect name of the SP reach effect is red, maker pattern, and rainbow than when it is white. may also be configured to increase the number of blackened stars.

In the telop effect of FIG. 70(E), for example, a moving image of a confrontation between Character B and Character I is displayed, and a character string attached to Character B (or Character I) is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700. A character string (telop) saying "Let's settle" is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 70(F), an image (moving image may be used) immediately before the conclusion between character B and character I is displayed. However, since FIG. 70(F) is not a telop effect, the telop of character B (or character I) is not displayed.

Next, in FIG. 70(G), an operation request effect appears in the image display area 700, and a large size PUSH button image is displayed. Then, in FIG. 70(G), when the player presses (PUSH) the production button 3j within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period elapses, a display is made based on the game result (big hit/loss) of the variation. The image branches to FIG. 70(H) or FIG. 70(J). In FIG. 70(G), regardless of whether the player presses (PUSH) the production button 3j or not, it is configured to always branch to FIG. 70(H) or FIG. 70(J). , the decoration accessories 781 and 782 operate with seven-color gradation light emission. However, if the player presses (PUSH) the effect button 3j, that is, if the player presses (PUSH) the effect button 3j before reaching the valid operation period (for example, immediately after starting the valid operation period), the player presses the effect button 3j. It is configured such that the operation time accompanied by the seven-color gradation light emission of the decoration accessories 781 and 782 and/or the time of displaying "WIN" described later is longer than when (PUSH) is not performed. In addition, after the operation request effect is displayed, a new telop effect may be displayed. utterance output), and in the event of a loss (defeat), a telop "I lost..." may be displayed (and utterance output corresponding to that telop). A combination of a telop effect before displaying an operation request effect and a telop effect after displaying an operation request effect is preferably regarded as one telop effect with a story (that is, this combination is one type of telop effect). is.

FIG. 70(H) is an example of a display image when the game result of the variation is a big win. In FIG. 70(H), a character string image of "WIN" representing the victory of character B, who is an ally character, is displayed, and in FIG. In this example, "555") is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 70(J) is an example of a display image when the game result of the variation is a loss. In FIG. 70(J), a character string image of "LOSE" representing the defeat of character B, who is an ally character, is displayed. In this example, "545") is stopped and displayed.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 70, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the dialogue effect and the telop effect appear during the same variation of the special symbols. As described in the individual explanations regarding the dialogue effect and the telop effect, the character strings displayed in each effect are usually displayed in a predetermined normal color (for example, white), but there It may be displayed using a character color (for example, red, rainbow, etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation. Therefore, even when the dialogue effect and the telop effect are displayed during the same variation of the special symbol, the character strings may be displayed using different character colors for the dialogue effect and the telop effect.

Here, the case of changing the character color of the character string displayed in the dialogue effect and the telop effect during the same variation of the special symbol will be described in detail. As for the indication of the expectation level during the same fluctuation, once the upgrade occurs, it is common to only suggest a higher level of expectation thereafter. It is also possible to execute a downgrading production pattern in which characters appear in a suggestive character color (eg, red) and the telop production suggests a low degree of expectation (eg, white or blue). By configuring in this manner, the variation of the degree of expectation suggestion by the character color (combination pattern of the character color) is increased, and various game properties can be provided. In addition, when the telop effect appears during the execution of a specific effect (for example, a type of SP reach effect, a full rotation effect in which a big hit is confirmed), the character color that indicates a high degree of expectation is always An effect pattern may be prepared in which the character string is displayed in a different specific color (white) (there is only one character color variation). As a modification, when the telop effect appears during execution of a specific effect (for example, a type of SP reach effect, a full rotation effect in which a big hit is confirmed), a character indicating a high degree of expectation is always displayed. A production pattern may be prepared in which a character string is displayed in a color (rainbow) (there is only one variation of the character color).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the dialogue effect and the telop effect can appear during the same variation of the special symbol, the dialogue effect and the telop effect are configured to diverge the effect development according to their respective success patterns and failure patterns. may be For example, the success pattern in the line production after the establishment of reach is a pattern that develops into SP reach production, and the failure pattern in the dialogue production after establishment of reach is normal reach (without developing into SP reach production). It is possible to prepare an effect pattern such as a pattern. In the case where the line production becomes a failure pattern, since it does not develop into the SP reach production, no telop production occurs after that during the same variation of the special symbols. With the configuration as described above, the importance of the success or failure of the dialogue effect increases, so that the effect of making the player interested in the dialogue effect appearing earlier than the telop effect can be obtained.

Further, in this embodiment, when the dialogue effect and the telop effect can appear during the same variation of the special symbols, the dialogue effect may occur before the ready-to-win is established. For example, it is possible to prepare production patterns such that a success pattern of line production results in reach establishment, and a failure pattern results in reach failure. If the line effect becomes a failure pattern, the ready-to-win state is not established, so the telop effect does not occur after that during the same variation of the special symbol. With the configuration as described above, the importance of the success or failure of the dialogue effect increases, so an effect of increasing the interest of the player in the dialogue effect can be expected.

<5-2. Feature comparison between dialogue production and telop production>
In the following, the features of dialogue effects and telop effects, which are character effects, will be compared.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation request effect is more likely to occur after the same fluctuation when the telop effect appears than when the dialogue effect appears. good. Specifically, the ratio of the operation request effect occurring within the same variation after the dialogue effect appears is 40%, and the ratio of the operation request effect occurring within the same variation after the telop effect appears is 90%. It is preferable to In general, the operation request effect is a effect that raises the level of expectation for the game result or the game development, so in the above configuration, the telop effect can be given more importance than the dialogue effect.

Furthermore, the operation request effect generated in the above situation may have a plurality of types of effect patterns suggesting different expectations for the result of the effect, and the operation request effect that appears after the telop effect during the same change may be used. , there is a specific production pattern (for example, a PUSH button image with a red effect, a PUSH button image with a set effect, etc.) that has a higher degree of expectation than the operation request production that appears after the dialogue production during the same change. It may be configured to be easily selected. Here, as the operation request effect, the normal PUSH button image has the lowest expectation, and the PUSH button image with a red effect, the normal PUSH button image with a collective effect, and the PUSH button with a red effect with a collective effect. Expectations increase in order of image. Note that the group effect is an effect as if a push button image were formed by gathering specific effects from the top, bottom, left, and right before the push button image is displayed (the push button image is displayed without the group effect). When it is displayed, the PUSH button image suddenly appears from the state where there is no PUSH button image. (It also serves as a preliminary suggestion). On top of that, for example, if an operation request effect occurs within the same variation after the dialogue effect appears, in the case of a big hit, the operation request effect is 60% of the normal PUSH button image, and the PUSH button with a red effect If the image is 40% and you are wrong, the operation request effect will be the normal PUSH button image at 90% and the PUSH button image with red effect will be displayed at 10%, and after the telop effect appears, within the same fluctuation If the operation request effect occurs in the case of a big hit, the operation request effect is 10% for the normal PUSH button image, 20% for the PUSH button image with red effect, and the normal PUSH button with collective effect The image is 30%, the PUSH button image with a red effect with a set effect is 40%, and in the case of a failure, the operation request effect is a normal PUSH button image at 40%, and the PUSH button image with a red effect. is displayed at 30%, the normal PUSH button image with aggregate effect at 20%, and the red effected PUSH button image with aggregate effect at 10%. With this configuration, the importance of the telop effect can be further increased compared to the dialogue effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the character strings displayed in a predetermined dialogue effect (for example, a dialogue effect appearing before the ready-to-win state is established) may be allowed to be displayed in the display area of the sub-decorative pattern. For example, in the speech production of FIG. However, in the case of FIG. 70(C), the character string display area for the dialogue effect overlaps the display area for the sub-decorative pattern 720, but the display priority of the sub-decorative pattern 720 is higher than the character string display area for the dialogue effect. The visibility of the decorative pattern is ensured because the product is also high. Further, as another example, it is not permitted to display a character string that is displayed in a predetermined dialogue effect in the display area of the sub-decorative pattern (a display area that does not overlap with the display area of the sub-decorative pattern is set). good. When adopting this alternative example, the effect of securing the visibility of the sub-decorative pattern (broadly, the entire decorative pattern) can be obtained without giving any influence by the dialogue production.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is absolutely not allowed that the character strings displayed in a predetermined telop effect (for example, a telop effect that appears during the SP ready-to-win effect) overlap the display area of the sub-decorative pattern. preferable. By setting such a limit, mainly in the second half of the variable display of the special design, the visibility of the decorative design is impaired due to the appearance of the telop effect (for example, when trying to display the sub-decorative design as a substitute for the main decorative design hidden) can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the dialogue effect and the operation request effect are combined, the operation request effect may be configured such that the timing at which the dialogue effect starts can be varied. In other words, the display by the dialogue effect may be restricted (delayed) until the predetermined condition (execution of the input operation of the effect input device or elapse of the operation effective period) in the operation request effect is satisfied. On the other hand, the timing at which the telop effect is started (especially the timing at which the telop is displayed) does not depend on the input operation of the effect input device accompanying the operation request effect. That is, the telop effect is started at a preset timing without being restricted by the input operation of the effect input device (for example, pressing operation of the effect button 3j, etc.).

Further, in the dialogue rendering of the present embodiment, the image display of the rendering input device may be performed by the operation request rendering while the character string (dialogue) is being displayed by the dialogue rendering. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 68(C), the PUSH button image is displayed while the dialogue of character A remains displayed by the dialogue effect displayed in FIG. 68(B). Then, when the effect button 3j is pressed or the valid operation period elapses, the dialogue of character B is displayed as the next character string display by the dialogue effect, as shown in FIG. 68(D). On the other hand, in the telop effect of the present embodiment, the image display of the effect input device by the operation request effect is not performed while the character string (telop) is displayed by the telop effect. This is because the specification does not cause changes during the telop effect by pressing the effect button 3j due to the operation request effect. Image display may be performed. As a modification, it may be configured such that the image display of the effect input device by the operation request effect is performed while the character string (telop) is displayed by the telop effect. It is desirable that the operation request effect during the display of the telop is to request repeated hits (multiple operations) of the effect button 3j. The PUSH button image is displayed, and the PUSH button image is continuously displayed along with the character string display of "Keep hitting!" Don't give up until!", and the corresponding telop can be displayed with the change).

<6. Relation between character effects (dialogue effects, telop effects) and other game effects>
In this embodiment, the effect control board 200 can execute various effect patterns by combining character effects (line effects, telop effects) and other game effects. In this chapter, regarding the relationship between character effects and other game effects, etc., the characteristics of each will be explained, citing representative examples of effect patterns as necessary.

<6-1. Combined with SP reach performance>
As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 described above, the specific timing at which the telop effect appears is after the development of the SP ready-to-win effect. The telop effect) can be executed in combination with the SP reach effect. Below, the combination of the character effect and the SP ready-to-win effect will be described in detail, taking the telop effect as an example and presenting another effect example (see FIG. 71).

First, the SP reach effect will be explained. The SP ready-to-win production is one aspect of the ready-to-win production that appears when a ready-to-win state (for example, a state in which two of the three main decorative patterns are stopped at the same pattern) is shown in the variable display of decorative patterns. This is a ready-to-win effect with a higher degree of expectation for the game result (hit) than the normal ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect). Like a general pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a plurality of types of SP ready-to-win effects. SP reach production may be provided with various start timings. Specifically, for example, after establishment of the ready-to-win state (establishment of ready-to-win state), normal ready-to-win production may be performed, and then SP ready-to-win production may be developed from the middle of the normal ready-to-reach production. The normal reach effect is a moving image that suggests a high degree of expectation and is a reach effect that does not involve the playback display of a moving image that has a story. ), which is a moving image that suggests high expectations and is a reach effect that does not accompany playback display of a moving image that has a story.

As a representative example of the SP ready-to-win production that can be executed in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. The result is shown, and if you lose the battle, the result of losing is shown. Also, a resurrection pattern may be prepared in which victory (big hit) is indicated through a resurrection effect after the defeat of the battle is suggested. Also, an effect pattern may be prepared in which an operation request effect, a telop effect, or the like appears during the SP ready-to-win effect.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a screen transition example of effects in which telop effects and SP ready-to-win effects are combined. In FIG. 71(A), the image display area 700 shows that the ready-to-win state with the "7" symbol is established by the main decorative symbol 710. In FIG. After this ready-to-win state, the SP ready-to-win effect develops halfway through the normal ready-to-win effect, or simultaneously with establishment of the ready-to-win state. In addition, during this normal reach production, or before the normal reach production is executed (before the reach is established), a step-up production in which the characters P and Q are displayed, a dialogue production, etc. may be executed, and if executed, a big hit ( Alternatively, it may be configured so that a probability variable jackpot) is determined.

In the SP ready-to-win effect, in FIG. 71(B), the effect name of the SP ready-to-win effect to be started (in this example, “time of conclusion”) is displayed in the entire image display area 700 . Then, in the SP reach effect, a telop effect appears from FIG. 71(C). Also, from FIG. 71(B) to FIGS. 71(G) and (I), the main decorative design 710 is hidden, but the sub decorative design 720 is always displayed.

In FIG. 71(C), where the display of the moving image by the telop effect has started, character A, an ally character, is displayed, and a character string attached to character A is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700. ” is displayed. In the next FIG. 71(D), the display of character H, which is one of the enemy characters, is added, and as a character string attached to character H, a character string (telop ) is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 71(E), a movable accessory effect occurs while the display of the moving image by the telop effect progresses. In the case of FIG. 71(E), the decorative accessories 781 and 782 move to the operating position and appear in front of the image display area 700, so that the character decoration "Geki" provided on the decorative accessory 781 and the decorative accessory Along with the character decoration "fight" provided in 782, the characters of "fierce battle" are displayed to the player. Here, the decorative accessories 781 and 782 are movable accessories that can move between an initial position that is invisible to the player and an operating position that is visible to the player. Its operation is controlled by the control means 240). The initial positions of the decorative accessories 781 and 782 are set to the side of the effect display device 70 and the back side of the game panel 100b. The operating positions of the decorative accessories 781 and 782 are exposed near the center of the image display area 700 as shown in FIG. 71(E). When the decorative accessories 781 and 782 move to the operating position, most of the image display area 700 is covered, but as shown in FIG. The visibility of the pattern is ensured. In this example, while the decorative accessories 781 and 782 are moving from the standby position to the operating position, the display of the sub-decorative pattern 720 is allowed to be hidden momentarily. , 781 (which can be considered to include all the decorative accessories not shown) may secure a display area for the sub-decorative pattern 720 in a display area that does not overlap when any action is performed. In addition, in the movable role production using the decorative accessories 781 and 782, the decorative accessories 781 and 782 return from the operating position to the initial position after the lapse of the preset time, so the display progress of the moving image by the telop production is slowed down. No impact on time schedule. However, if the decorative accessories 781 and 782 malfunction (for example, an event in which a command related to an operation instruction cannot be received due to motor failure or disconnection detection), the movable accessories will not return to the initial position. , If this state continues, the visibility of the telop effect will be hindered. It is possible, and it is preferable to configure so that even if an operation abnormality occurs in the decorative accessories 781 and 782, an error notification sound related to the operation abnormality will not be generated (this can be grasped by the output sound).

Then, in FIG. 71(F) after the end of the movable character production, the appearance of the confrontation between the character A and the character H is displayed in the moving image by the telop production, and the character A (which may also be the character H) is attached to the moving image. A character string (telop) of "let's settle" is displayed at the bottom of the image display area 700 as the character string to be displayed. After that, the display image branches to FIG. 71(G) or FIG. 71(I) based on the game result (big hit/loss) of the variation.

FIG. 71(G) is an example of a display image when the game result of the variation is a big win. In FIG. 71(G), an image reminiscent of the victory of character A, who is an ally character, is displayed, and after that, in FIG. 777”) is stopped.

On the other hand, FIG. 71(I) is an example of a display image when the game result of the variation is a loss. In FIG. 69(I), an image reminiscent of the defeat of character A, who is an ally character (in other words, the victory of character I, which is an enemy character) is displayed. The sub-decorative pattern 720 is stop-displayed in a lost mode ("767" in this example). Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 71, when the game result of the variation is a big win, after an image suggesting the defeat of character A is displayed as shown in FIG. It is also possible to develop such that an image in which character A wins is displayed, and when character A wins from behind, the display transitions to the big hit result of FIG. 71(H).

As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 71, the telop effect appears during execution of the SP ready-to-win effect starting from FIG. 71(B). The display period of the telop effect can be from FIG. 71(C) to FIG. 71(F). However, in this rendering example, a character string (telop) is also displayed in FIGS. 70(G) and (I) after branching. Therefore, when two types of moving images are prepared, including the image after branching according to the winning/losing result, FIGS. 71C to 70G and FIGS. ) may be configured as another type of telop effect. Further, as described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 71, during the telop effect, a movable accessory effect that does not affect the display progress of the moving image by the telop effect can be executed.

Based on the above specific example, the effect pattern that can be executed by combining the character effect (telop effect, dialogue effect) and the SP ready-to-win effect in this embodiment can have the following characteristics. Note that the production pattern does not need to have all of the plurality of features described below, and may have at least one of the features or a combination of the features.

In the present embodiment, when executed in combination with the SP ready-to-play effect, in the character string display by the telop effect, various change patterns can be adopted for the character color that suggests the degree of expectation, thereby enhancing the playability of the telop effect. be able to.

For example, it is possible to upgrade or lower the character color within the telop presentation. Specifically, the character colors of the three telop displays shown in FIGS. 71(C), (D), and (F) are changed from "white" to "white/red" to "red/rainbow" in the case of upgrading. is possible, and in the case of a downgrade, a change from "white" to "red" to "white" is possible. Note that the timing for changing the character color may be set at a specific timing (for example, a predetermined break in the SP ready-to-win effect, hit/lose display, cut-in effect, character object effect, etc.).

Further, for example, when a chance-up of suggestion expectation occurs in the telop effect during the SP ready-to-win effect, and then a specific display showing the game result of winning (jackpot) is performed, the character string display after the specific display is colored. may be configured to upgrade/downgrade the To explain in detail using a specific example, in the telop production during the SP reach production, the telop display is performed in a predetermined character color (for example, red or gold) that suggests a relatively high degree of expectation, and the winning branch after that When a (jackpot) route specific display (see, for example, FIG. 71 (G)) is performed, the character color of the subsequent telop display within the same variation is upgraded (for example, rainbow color), It can be configured to be downgraded (e.g. to the normal color white). That is, in the telop effect during the SP ready-to-win effect, when a specific display representing a win (big hit) game result is performed via a character string display (chance up) with a highly anticipated character color, after the specific display In the SP ready-to-win effect of 1, the telop display can be performed in a character color different from the character color before the specific display.

Also, for example, when a chance-up of suggestion expectation occurs in the telop effect during the SP reach effect, and then a specific display indicating the game result of losing is performed, the character color is always downgraded in the character string display after the specific display. may be configured to be To explain in detail using a specific example, in the telop effect during the SP reach effect, the telop display is performed in a predetermined character color (for example, red or gold) that suggests a relatively high degree of expectation, and the subsequent winning branch losing route. 71 (I)) is performed, the character color of subsequent telop display within the same variation is always downgraded (for example, normal color white).

Also, for example, the telop effect in which the character appears during the SP reach effect is combined, and the telop that accompanies the character before and after the winning branch (after the winning branch, the ally character's telop, and after the losing branch, the enemy character's telop) In the production pattern where is displayed, the telop after the winning branch is always displayed in normal color (white), while the telop before the winning branch (may be limited just before the winning branch) , may be configured to always be displayed in a character color other than the normal color (for example, red or gold). In such a configuration, regardless of whether the win-lose result is a win or a loss, the telop display is performed in a character color having a degree of suggestion expectation before the win-lose branch, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As described above, the combination of the character effect and the SP ready-to-win effect has been explained by taking the telop effect as an example. may be configured to That is, an effect pattern combining a dialogue effect and an SP ready-to-win effect may be prepared, or an effect pattern combining a dialogue effect, a telop effect and an SP ready-to-win effect may be prepared. Furthermore, in the above combination, the SP ready-to-win effect may be replaced with a normal ready-to-win effect.

<6-2. Combined with pattern pseudo stop effect>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, character effects (line effects, telop effects) can be executed in combination with symbol pseudo-stop effects. Hereinafter, a detailed description will be given while presenting an example of rendering in FIG.

First, the symbol pseudo stop effect (also referred to as pseudo continuous effect) will be described. The symbol pseudo-stop effect is an effect in which a "pseudo change" in which the main decorative symbol 710 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) from varying during one variation of the special symbol can be performed multiple times. Therefore, "pseudo-continuous N-th (also referred to as pseudo-N)" means the N-th pseudo-fluctuation during one-time special symbol fluctuation. In the symbol pseudo-stop effect, when the symbol pseudo-stop is performed to display a predetermined temporary display mode (for example, the "continuation symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol 712), the main decorative symbol 710 is temporarily stopped. By re-fluctuation, the next pseudo-fluctuation is started. In addition, the main decorative pattern 710 is temporarily stopped immediately before the final stop (for example, when the final stop is made at "456", the one second immediately before that is a temporary stop with shaking fluctuation at "456"). In the final pseudo fluctuation during the fluctuation of the special symbol of the time, it will be fixed and stopped after temporarily stopping (temporary stopping) from the fluctuation.

The simulated symbol stop effect is generally configured such that the more the number of simulated symbol stops increases, the higher the degree of expectation for development of the effect. In addition, the development of the performance whose success or failure is indicated by the symbol pseudo-stop performance includes, for example, development to the SP ready-to-win performance, development to a specific SP ready-to-win performance, or development to the second half of the SP ready-to-win performance. In addition, the effect control board 200 can output a dedicated background image (specific background image) and BGM (specific sound) corresponding to the effect with execution of the symbol pseudo stop effect. In addition, in the pattern pseudo-stop effect, if the main decorative pattern 710 is temporarily stopped in a failing manner before the end of the variable time, specific image processing (fade out, darkening, etc.) is performed, and the main decoration is displayed at the end of the variable time The design 710 may be configured to be fixed and stopped. Alternatively, after the provisional stop of the failing mode, the specific image processing is performed, the main decorative pattern 710 is started to change again, and then, at the end of the variable time, it is configured to be fixedly stopped in the failing mode. good too.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of an effect in which a dialogue effect and a symbol pseudo-stop effect are combined. In FIG. 72(A), the main decorative design 710 and the sub decorative design 720 that are changing are displayed in the image display area 700 . Then, in the next FIG. 72(B), the symbol pseudo-stop effect is started. As described above, output of a dedicated background image (specific background image) or BGM (specific sound) may be started along with the start of the symbol pseudo-stop effect. 72, the sub-decorative pattern 720 is always displayed on the upper right of the image display area 700. As shown in FIG.

In the symbol pseudo-stop effect shown in FIG. 72, the upper limit number of symbol pseudo-stops in which the main decorative symbol 710 temporarily stops due to pseudo fluctuation is set to three times (that is, the pseudo run is up to four times at maximum). When the symbol pseudo stop is successful in the symbol pseudo stop effect shown in FIG. 72, when the ready-to-win state is established by the temporary stop of the left symbol 711 and the right symbol 713 of the main decorative symbol 710, the middle symbol 712 is simulated continuously. The continuous pattern ("NEXT" pattern in this example) for notifying or suggesting the occurrence of is temporarily stopped, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the main decorative pattern 710 starts to change again, and the next pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo variation) occurs. On the other hand, when the symbol pseudo-stop fails in the symbol pseudo-stop effect shown in FIG. 72, for example, two transition patterns are prepared. The first transition pattern is a pattern in which the left pattern 711 and the right pattern 713 of the main decorative pattern 710 are temporarily stopped, and the middle pattern 712 is also temporarily stopped while the ready-to-win state is not established, and the pattern combination of the losing mode is temporarily displayed. In this case, after performing specific image processing (fade-out, darkening, etc.), the simulated symbol stop effect ends. A decorative pattern 720 is stopped and displayed. As described above, the main decorative pattern 710 may be changed again during the period from the end of the pattern pseudo-stop effect to the end of the decorative pattern change time, or may be provisionally displayed without being changed again. The lost mode may be maintained. However, the above-described first transition pattern is applied only when the first symbol simulation stop is unsuccessful, and the second transition pattern is applied when the second and subsequent symbol simulation stops are unsuccessful. The second transition pattern is a pattern in which when the ready-to-reach state is established by the temporary stop of the left pattern 711 and the right pattern 713 of the main decorative pattern 710, the continuation pattern does not temporarily stop in the middle pattern 712. In this case, the pattern is simulated. After the stop effect is completed, the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in the second transition pattern, the medium design 712 does not temporarily stop the continuation design may be that the medium design 712 itself does not temporarily stop, or that the medium design 712 is a design other than the continuation design (however, a big hit is not selected) may be a temporary stop (that is, the main decorative symbol 710 is temporarily stopped in a reach-losing mode).

In addition, the symbol pseudo stop effect shown in FIG. 72 depends on the number of symbol pseudo stops (the number of pseudo fluctuations), and the degree of expectation of development of the subsequent effect (expectation of development to the SP ready-to-win effect) or/and the subsequent effect It is assumed that the tendency of the development destination (tendency of which kind of SP reach production is likely to develop) is configured to change. Specifically, when the pattern pseudo stop effect is completed in the first pseudo run (pseudo 1), there are cases where reach is established and cases where reach is not established, and even if reach is established, normal reach production stops. There are many things, and the possibility of developing into SP reach production is low. On the other hand, when the pattern pseudo stop effect is completed in the second pseudo-continuation (pseudo 2), the establishment of ready-to-win is confirmed, and development beyond the normal ready-to-win effect is confirmed, and more than in the case of pseudo-1, it develops into the SP ready-to-win effect. There is a high possibility that it will develop into an SP reach effect with a relatively high degree of expectation than in the case of Pseudo 1. When the pattern pseudo stop production ends in the third pseudo run (pseudo 3), the establishment of the reach is confirmed, and the development to the SP reach production is confirmed, and the expectation is relatively higher than in the case of the pseudo 2. There is a high possibility that it will develop into an SP reach production. If the pattern pseudo stop effect develops up to the upper limit of the pseudo-continuation 4 times (pseudo 4), the development to the all-rotation reach effect, which is a special SP reach effect, is confirmed, and the result of the jackpot is guaranteed after the full-rotation reach effect. shown. In addition, the expression of the above configuration specifications is when the transition of the production is seen mainly, and in fact, the production control board 200, based on the hit-loss result and the fluctuation time in the variation, A suitable production pattern can be selected.

In FIG. 72(C), as the first dialogue effect, character A appears in the vicinity of the center of image display area 700 in an emphasized manner, and the dialogue "Continue?" Is displayed. The character color of the dialogue display in this first dialogue production is, for example, a normal white color. The character strings "Continue?" and "NEXT!", which are displayed in the dialogue effect and will be described later, indicate the degree of expectation for the game development as to whether or not the simulated symbol stop will be successful. Yes, for example, strings with "?" are more likely to be suggested than strings with "?", and strings with "!" It can be assumed that the degree of suggestion expectation is high (or the success of the simulated symbol stop is confirmed). In FIG. 72(C), the main decorative design 710 is hidden by the display image of the dialogue effect, but the display state of the main decorative design 710 is compensated by the display of the sub decorative design 720. This also applies to FIGS. 72(J) and (P).

After the dialogue production of FIG. 72(C), the game development branches. If the first pseudo-continued pattern pseudo-stop fails (failure to shift to the second pseudo-continued), the transition to FIG. If the transition succeeds), the transition to FIG. 72(H) is made.

In FIG. 72(D), the left pattern 711 and the right pattern 713 of the main decorative pattern 710 are temporarily stopped, so that the middle pattern 712 is also temporarily stopped while the ready-to-win state is not established, and the pattern combination "334" in the losing mode is provisionally displayed. Thus, the failure of the first simulated symbol stop (failure to shift to the second simulated run) is indicated. As described above, after failing in the first simulated symbol stop (failed to shift to the second simulated succession) due to the provisional display of the symbol combination in the losing mode, the ready-to-win effect is not developed, and a specific Image processing (darkening processing in this example) is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72E, the displayed image in the image display area 700 is gradually darkened, and finally, as shown in FIG. . However, as also shown in FIGS. 72(E) and (F), the sub-decorative pattern 720 is not affected by the specific image processing, and its display is maintained. Then, after the specific image processing is completed, the dark display is canceled, and at the end of the variable time, the main decorative pattern 710 is stopped and displayed in the temporary display of FIG. be. As a result, it is determined that the game result of the change is a loss (FIG. 72(G)). Also, in FIG. 72(G), the sub-decorative pattern 720 is also stop-displayed at the same pattern combination "334" as the main decorative pattern 710.

As described above, in the symbol pseudo-stop effect shown in FIG. 72, the first transition pattern and the second transition pattern are prepared in the case where the symbol pseudo-stop of the first pseudo run fails. (D) conforms to the first transition pattern. Therefore, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 72, if the first symbol simulation stop fails, the left symbol 711 and the right symbol 713 of the main decorative symbol 710 are provisionally displayed in accordance with the second transition pattern. It is also conceivable that the continuation symbol does not temporarily stop at the medium symbol 712 when the ready-to-win state is established by the stop. In this case, for example, while the ready-to-win state with the "3" symbol is maintained, the symbol pseudo-stop effect ends, and the ready-to-win effect (for example, FIG. 72(K) to be described later) is entered.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72(H), as a success of the first simulated symbol stop (simulated 2 or more confirmed), the middle symbol 712 of the main decorative symbol 710 is temporarily stopped at the continuation symbol "NEXT" symbol. After that, the main decorative symbol 710 is changed again, and the second pseudo-run is started (FIG. 72(I)). Then, in the second pseudo-continuation, the second dialogue effect appears, and character B's dialogue "Continue!?" is displayed (Fig. 72(J)). The character color of the dialogue display in this second dialogue production is, for example, red, which suggests a high degree of expectation. When "Continue!" is displayed, the success of the simulated symbol stop may be confirmed, and "Continue?" and "Continue!?" Further, "Continue!" can be white or red, but "Continue?" and "Continue!?"

After the dialogue production in FIG. 72(J), the game develops for a branch. If the second pseudo-continued pattern pseudo-stop fails (failure to shift to the third pseudo-continued), the transition to FIG. If the transfer succeeds), the process transitions to FIG. 72(N).

In FIG. 72(K), the symbol pseudo-stop effect is completed, the ready-to-win state by the "3" symbol of the main decorative symbol 710 is established, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started. When the symbol pseudo-stop effect ends, the output of the background image (specific background image) and BGM (specified sound) dedicated to the symbol pseudo-stop effect is also terminated, and the output is switched to the normal background image and BGM. Thereafter, by stopping the fluctuation of the main decorative symbols 710 and the sub decorative symbols 720, a loss (FIG. 72(L)) or a big win (FIG. 72(M)) is indicated as a game result. It should be noted that, as shown in FIGS. 72(J) to 72(K), when transitioning from the simulated symbol stop effect to the ready-to-win effect, when the simulated symbol stop effect ends, it is explained in FIGS. 72(E) and (F). Such specific image processing (darkening processing in this example) may be performed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72(N), as the success of the second simulated symbol stop (3 or more simulated symbols confirmed), the middle symbol 712 of the main decorative symbol 710 is temporarily stopped at the continuation symbol "NEXT" symbol. After that, the main decorative symbol 710 is changed again, and the third pseudo-run is started (FIG. 72(O)). Then, in the third pseudo-continuation, the third dialogue effect appears, and the dialogue "NEXT!" of Character C is displayed (FIG. 72(P)). The character color of the dialogue display in this third dialogue production is, for example, gold, which suggests a higher degree of expectation than the red color of the second dialogue production. When "NEXT!" is displayed, the success of the simulated symbol stop may be confirmed, and "NEXT?" and "NEXT!" Also, "NEXT!" can be white or red, but "NEXT?" and "NEXT!?"

After the dialogue production in FIG. 72(P), the game development branches. If the third pseudo-continued pattern pseudo-stop fails (failure to shift to the fourth pseudo-continued), the transition to FIG. If the transition succeeds), the transition to FIG. 72(R) is made.

In FIG. 72(Q), the symbol pseudo-stop effect is completed, the ready-to-win state by the "3" symbol of the main decorative symbol 710 is established, and the SP ready-to-win effect is started. When the symbol pseudo-stop effect ends, the output of the background image (specific background image) and BGM (specified sound) dedicated to the symbol pseudo-stop effect is also terminated, and the output is switched to the normal background image and BGM. Thereafter, by stopping the fluctuation of the main decorative symbols 710 and the sub decorative symbols 720, a loss (FIG. 72(L)) or a big win (FIG. 72(M)) is indicated as a game result.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72(R), as the success of the third simulated symbol stop (quasi-four confirmed), the main decorative symbol 710 is temporarily stopped at the "NEXT" symbol, which is the continuation symbol. After that, the main decorative symbol 710 is changed again (Fig. 72 (S)), but since the number of pseudo-runs has reached the upper limit of four times, the symbol pseudo-stop effect ends at this point, and the privilege of reaching pseudo-4. As a result, a full rotation reach that is a special SP reach effect appears (Fig. 72 (T)). When the pattern pseudo stop effect ends, the output of the background image (specific background image) and BGM (specific sound) dedicated to the pattern pseudo stop effect also ends, but in the case of full rotation reach, special SP reach treated as premium As effects, a dedicated background image or BGM may be output. In this example, in the case of all-rotation reach, a game result of a big hit is always displayed (Fig. 72 (M)).

As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 72, the dialogue effect appears three times during execution of the symbol pseudo-stop effect. Note that the character color of the character string displayed in each dialogue effect is not limited to the example described above, and may be changed to various character colors that suggest the level of expectation for the game result or game development.

Based on the above specific example, the effect pattern that can be executed by combining the character effect (telop effect, dialogue effect) and the symbol pseudo-stop effect in this embodiment can have the following characteristics.

First, when the variable display of the main decorative symbols 710 is restarted after the end of the simulated symbol stop effect (at the time of re-fluctuation), the display of the background image (specific background image) corresponding to the simulated symbol stop effect ends and the normal background is displayed. You may return to the image. Also, the output of BGM (specific sound) corresponding to the symbol pseudo-stop effect may be ended, and the output may be switched to normal BGM.

In addition, in the pattern pseudo-stop effect, when specific image processing (fade out, blackout, etc.) is performed when the effect development (continuation of pseudo-continuation, normal reach effect, development to SP reach effect) fails, effect display device 70 ( In the image display area 700), a special mode screen associated with the image processing is displayed. Specifically, when the fade-out process is performed, a foggy screen is displayed, and when the darkening process is performed, the darkened screens shown in FIGS. 72(E) and 72(F) are displayed. be done.

When the above specific image processing (fade-out, darkening) is performed, if a character effect (dialogue effect or telop effect) is displayed, the character string display by the character effect is immediately terminated. Alternatively, it becomes the target of specific image processing and the display is gradually terminated. On the other hand, the sub-decorative pattern 720 is not subject to specific image processing, and its display is maintained. By maintaining the display of the sub-decorative symbols 720, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the decorative symbols for the player. In addition, the above-mentioned specific image processing may be executed when an effect indicating a failure is displayed in the SP reach effect. When the SP reach effect is executed, the above specific image processing fades out and darkens, and then the background image of each stage within the same variable display (SP reach effect development Background image of the previously displayed stage). However, even in this case, the above specific image processing is not performed on the sub-decorative pattern 720 and the pending number display 770, and the visibility thereof is not impaired.

Also, when performing the above specific image processing (fade out, blackout), as a general rule, the audio output is stopped or limited, that is, the sound is silenced or the output is reduced (volume is reduced), but in exceptional cases In addition, when an error occurs, an error display or an error voice output (output of an error voice for notification that is always output at a constant volume regardless of the volume setting) may be performed. However, the above-mentioned exceptional configuration may not necessarily be taken for the occurrence of all errors. Restrictions may be made so that error display and error sound output are not performed during image processing. Specific error types are explained in detail in the next section.

<6-3. Relationship with error display>
This section explains the relationship between character rendering and error display. In the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined error is detected, error processing is performed, and an error output corresponding to the detected error is performed (see FIGS. 33, 50, 51, etc.).

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a setting example of error output according to the type of error. FIG. 73 shows an example of setting an error output to be executed when each error is detected, regarding an example of detectable errors in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

Errors that can occur in the pachinko machine 1 are divided into errors that are notified to the outside (game parlor side) through the external information output terminal and errors that are not particularly notified. Errors that can occur in the pachinko machine 1 include errors that can occur due to dishonesty by the player, errors that can occur due to reasons other than dishonesty, cases that are caused by dishonesty, and errors that are not caused by dishonesty. Cases can also be classified into errors (warnings) and, where both are possible.

In FIG. 73, the column of "error signal" shows the presence or absence and type of an error signal that is output for notification to the outside when each error occurs. The "error notification sound" column shows the output setting of the error notification sound based on the occurrence of an error. The "audio restriction" column indicates whether or not to restrict other audio output when the error notification sound is output. The "display restriction" column indicates whether or not to restrict the display of other images when displaying an error based on the occurrence of an error. The columns of "front error display" and "rear error display" show the setting of the display destination of the error display based on the occurrence of the error.

An outline of each error illustrated in FIG. 73 will be described.

First, the magnetic sensor error (No. 1) is an error that occurs when the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism. A radio wave sensor error (No. 2) is an error that occurs when the radio wave sensor detects an illegal radio wave. A vibration sensor error (No. 3) is an error that occurs when the vibration sensor detects excessive vibration of the pachinko machine 1 . Abnormal operation error (No. 4) is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected in relation to various operations that affect the number of prize balls.

No. above. 1 to No. Error No. 4 is an error with a relatively high degree of importance regarding fraudulent play among errors that can occur due to fraud by a player or the like.

Next, the abnormal prize winning error (No. 5) is the starting port (first starting port 61, second starting port 62) and the big winning port 64. This is an error that occurs when it is detected. The abnormal passing error (No. 6) is an error that occurs when the big winning port 64 detects passage through a specific area when it is not open or outside the effective period, excessive passage, or the like. Ejection error (No. 7) is an error that occurs when an abnormality related to the ejection of game balls is detected. Abnormal connection error (No. 8) is when it is detected that the main control board 100 is not connected to various winning ports, various symbol display devices, external information output terminals, etc., which should be connected to the main control board 100. This is an error that occurs in

No. above. 5 to No. Error No. 8 is an error with a relatively low degree of importance regarding fraudulent play among errors that can occur due to fraud by a player or the like.

Next, the power-on warning (No. 9) is a notification indicating that power has been turned on with RAM clearing. Setting change/setting confirmation (No. 10) is a notification indicating execution of setting change/setting confirmation (unnecessary if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with a setting function). The door/frame open error (No. 11) is an error that occurs when the door open sensor 2p detects that the door/frame (front frame 4) is open.

No. above. 9 to No. The 11 errors (warnings) are errors (warnings) that can be caused both by fraud and by non-fraud.

Next, the communication error (No. 12) is an error indicating that communication between devices such as the main board 100, the effect control board 200, the image control board 300, the effect display device 70, and the payout control board 400 is disabled. be. A plate full error (No. 13) is an error indicating that the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 is full of game balls. A game ball payout error (No. 14) is an error indicating an abnormality related to the number of game balls to be paid out. The game ball rental device unconnected error (No. 15) is an error indicating that the game ball rental device is not connected.

No. above. 12 to No. The 15 errors are errors that can occur due to factors other than dishonesty of the player or the like.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which is capable of outputting an error for a plurality of types of errors, when an error set to display an error occurs, depending on the type of error, a telop effect is displayed. may be configured to perform error display with priority over character string display in . In other words, the error display may hinder the visibility of the character string display in the telop effect. It should be noted that the above "type of error" can be classified according to, for example, the "importance" of the illegal game. Specifically, for example, the door open error (No. 11 in FIG. 73), which is highly likely to be caused by maintenance work by a game clerk, can be classified as an error type with a low degree of importance, but is highly likely to be caused by illegal games. A magnet sensor error (No. 1 in FIG. 73) is classified as an error type with a high degree of importance. At this time, if a door opening error (low importance error type) occurs while the text display of the dialogue effect is displayed, the error display due to the door opening error (low importance error type) will The character string display is displayed in duplicate (error display and character string display for dialogue effects can be displayed at the same time, and at least the display area for error display and the display area for character string display for dialogue effects A part overlaps, and the character string display of the dialogue effect is displayed on the back side of the error display) On the other hand, the door opening error (low importance error type) while the character string display of the telop effect is being displayed If this occurs, the character string display for the telop effect will not be duplicated (the error display and the character string display for the telop effect can be displayed at the same time, and the display area for the error display and the character string for the telop effect The display area of the column display does not overlap at all). On the other hand, if a magnet sensor error (high importance error type) occurs while the character string display of the dialogue effect or telop effect is displayed, the error display due to the magnet sensor error (high importance error type) It is displayed redundantly for both character string display of effect and telop effect (error display and character string display of dialogue effect or telop effect can be displayed at the same time, and the display area of error display and dialogue At least a part of the display area of the character string display of the effect or telop effect overlaps, and the character string display of the dialogue effect or telop effect is displayed behind the error display) In addition, the magnet sensor error (high importance error The error display by type) may be displayed so as to cover the entire screen due to its importance. When (high importance error type) occurs, it is preferable that only the error display due to the magnet sensor error (high importance error type) is displayed, and the character string display of dialogue effect or telop effect is not displayed. By controlling in this way, when an error of a high importance type occurs, the occurrence of the error can be immediately displayed on the front of the image display area 700 even during execution of the character presentation. etc. makes it easier to notice the error. As a result, it is possible to expect the effect of quickly discovering fraudulent games and enhancing crime prevention.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an error display that notifies the occurrence of a predetermined error (preferably an error type with a relatively low degree of importance, such as a door opening error or a plate full error). can be displayed at the same time as the character effects (dialogue effects, plot effects), but can be displayed overlapping with the dialogue effects, but not overlapped with the telop effects (i.e., displayed simultaneously in a position that does not overlap). may be configured. However, in the case of the configuration as described above, the error sound corresponding to the predetermined error is limited to the voice output by the character presentation. Specifically, when the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs during the output of voice by character rendering, the error sound is output. error sound) is stopped (muted), or the volume is suppressed to a level lower than the error sound (error sound for notification that is always output at a constant volume regardless of the volume setting). As a result, even if an error is displayed in an inconspicuous manner during execution of the character presentation, the occurrence of a predetermined error can be notified by outputting an error sound. In such a situation (when the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs during the output of voice by character rendering), if the voice by character rendering (sound corresponding to dialogue or telop) is suppressed to a low volume, the volume will be reduced. Although the setting is possible, the volume of the error sound is not changed, only the volume of the voice due to the character rendering is suppressed and changed, and after the above-mentioned predetermined error is canceled and the error sound ends, the character It may be configured such that the output of the voice by the character rendering is resumed at the set volume after the suppression of the volume of the voice by the rendering is released. As a modification of this, the volume can be set, but the volume of the error sound is not changed, and the volume of the voice by character rendering is not changed, but after the predetermined error is canceled and the error sound ends. may be configured such that the output of the voice by the character effect is resumed at the set volume after the suppression of the voice by the character effect is released. In addition, in such a situation (when the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs during output of voice by character rendering), if the voice by character rendering (sound corresponding to dialogue or telop) is muted, the volume can be set. However, the volume of the error sound is not changed, and the volume of the sound produced by the character rendering remains muted. It may be configured such that the output of the voice by the character rendering is resumed at the set volume after the cancellation. With this configuration, by performing an operation related to volume setting, a volume setting adjustment screen is displayed, the current volume can be confirmed, and the volume change status can be confirmed based on the operation. It is possible, but the volume setting adjustment screen can be configured so that it is displayed superimposed with the character string for dialogue production (the display priority is higher for the adjustment screen for volume setting), but not superimposed with the character string for telop production. preferred.

<6-4. Relation with look-ahead effect, pending icon display, pending number display>
Although illustration was omitted in the screen transition examples shown in FIGS. A pending icon indicating the variable pending status is displayed. Also, in the image display area 700, an icon corresponding to the change (the change icon) may be displayed. These variable icons (the variable icon and the pending icon) are usually displayed in a predetermined display mode, but by changing the icon to change the display mode (color or pattern), the game result of the target variation ( It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the jackpot). A representative example of the game effect that changes the icon is the predictive effect of change hold (hold).

The look-ahead production is a production that starts at the time of the fluctuation of the preceding fluctuation that precedes the target fluctuation (target fluctuation) that is executed by digesting the target holding (target holding). This is an effect (inciting effect) that suggests the game result of the target change before reaching the target change, based on the result of pre-reading (the result of the pre-determination) of the hit-or-lose result of the target change. In general, look-ahead rendering is enabled if the hold to target pending digestion (until the target variation is reached) does not include the resulting hold at digestion. In such a look-ahead effect, for example, by changing the icon of the target pending, the game result of the target pending can be encouraged.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the above look-ahead effect can be executed in combination with the character effect. Therefore, in the following, an example of screen transition is shown in FIG. 74 with respect to the effect combining the look-ahead effect and the character effect, and then the features will be described. For convenience, in FIG. 74, the pending icon display shows only the pending icon corresponding to the pending of the first special symbol, but actually, the pending icon corresponding to the pending of the second special symbol may also be displayed. . This also applies to the display of the number of reservations, which will be described later. Also, the maximum number of stored first special symbols is set to four.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of effects in which read-ahead effects and character effects are combined. For example, as shown in FIG. 74A, on the lower side of the image display area 700, in order from the left side, the change icon 750 corresponding to the change, the first hold corresponding to the first hold (hold related to the next change) An icon 761, a second suspension icon 762 corresponding to the second suspension, a third suspension icon 763 corresponding to the third suspension, and a fourth suspension icon 764 corresponding to the fourth suspension are displayed. The first pending icon 761 to the fourth pending icon 764 are also collectively referred to as the pending icon 760 . 74, these icons (variation icon 750, suspension icon 760) are represented by white circles when there is no corresponding variation or suspension, and when there is a corresponding variation or suspension is represented by a display mode other than outline. In FIG. 74, the normal display mode of the variation icon when there is a corresponding variation or suspension is represented by solid filling, and the display color of the variation icon at this time is "black". Based on the above, in the case of FIG. 74(A), in addition to the variable icon 750, the suspension icon 760 is filled up to the third suspension icon 763. The accumulated state is shown. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, "hold [N]" may be referred to as "hold [N]".

FIG. 74(A) shows an image of the situation just before the third pending variation (holding 3) is added due to the entry of the game ball into the starting port while the variation display of the main decorative pattern 710 is being executed. A display area 700 is shown. Then, from FIG. 74(B) onward, an example of screen transition when the performance control board 200 executes the look-ahead effect is shown when the winning/losing result of the reservation 3 added in FIG. 74(A) is a big hit. . That is, hold 3 in FIG. 74(A) is the target hold.

In FIG. 74(B), the target hold icon is changed based on the result of preliminary determination by the look-ahead effect. Specifically, the display mode of the third pending icon 763 is changed from "black" of the normal mode to "red (slanted line pattern on the drawing)". In this example, the “red” display mode of the variation icon is a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation for the game result (jackpot) is very high (for example, the degree of expectation is 55%). In addition, as will be described later, the display mode of the icon suggesting the degree of expectation for the game result is prepared in addition to the above-mentioned "red", and the degree of suggestion expectation is "red (diagonal line pattern)", " "star mark" and "heat character" are assumed to be higher in this order.

Next FIG. 74(C) shows when the variation up to FIG. 74(B) has stopped, and the main decorative pattern 710 is stopped and displayed in the losing mode "235". After that, the pending icon 760 is moved to the left by one, and the next change starts (FIG. 74(D)). Therefore, in FIG. 74(D), the hold icon for the target hold of the prefetch effect has moved from the third hold icon 763 to the second hold icon 762 .

Then, in the variation started in FIG. 74(D), the first dialogue effect appears (FIG. 74(E)). In FIG. 74(E), character A is displayed as the first dialogue effect, and a character string (speech) of "Something is..." by character A is displayed. This dialogue effect suggests the possibility that "something" possibly beneficial to the player will occur in the current or future variation (at this point the expectation is low, about 5%).

Next, after the first dialogue effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the variable main decorative pattern 710 is stop-displayed in the losing mode "186". In addition, in FIG. 74(F), a third pending icon 763 is added in a normal mode (black) by adding one pending variation due to the entry of the game ball into the starting hole. After that, the pending icon 760 is moved to the left by one, and the next change starts (FIG. 74(G)). Therefore, in FIG. 74(G), the hold icon of the target hold of the look-ahead effect moves from the second hold icon 762 to the first hold icon 761, and the hold change added in FIG. 74(F) is the second hold icon 762.

Then, in the variation started in FIG. 74(G), the second dialogue effect appears (FIG. 74(H)). In FIG. 74(H), as the second dialogue effect, the character A is displayed again, and the character string (speech) of "near!" by the character A is displayed. This line effect suggests that the occurrence of an event that is probably advantageous to the player is "near" in the current fluctuation or future fluctuation (at this point, the expectation is relatively high, and the expectation is 20%. ).

After the second dialogue effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 74(I), an operation request effect appears and a PUSH button image is displayed. At this time, when the performance button 3j is pressed or the operation effective period elapses, the screen transitions to FIG. 74(J). In this example, it is assumed that this operation request effect ends with a success result. ” (see FIG. 74(J)).

In FIG. 74(J), the variable main decorative symbol 710 is stopped and displayed in the lost mode "462". After that, the pending icon 760 is moved to the left by one, and the next change starts (FIG. 74(K)). At this time, the hold icon of the target hold of the look-ahead effect moves from the first hold icon 761 to the change icon 760 .

FIG. 74(K) shows the image display area 700 when the change of the target change that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect is started. In FIG. 74(K), the display mode of the variable icon 750 is upgraded from "star mark" to "heated character". This is because a further icon change was made at the start of target variation. After that, the target variation establishes a ready-to-win state by the main decorative pattern 710 (FIG. 74(L)), and develops into the SP ready-to-win production "Decision Time" (FIG. 74(M)). In addition, in FIG. 74(L), the hold 2 is added by the entry of the game ball into the starting hole.

In the SP reach production started from FIG. 74(M), a telop production combined with a movable character production (FIG. 74(O)) appears (FIGS. 74(N) to 74(P)). . The screen transitions of FIGS. 74(M) to 74(P) have many points in common with the screen transitions of FIGS. 71(B) to 71(G), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

However, as a point not illustrated in FIGS. 71(B) to 71(G), in FIG. starts to be displayed. The pending number display 770 displays the pending numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a small size using numbers or the like at the end of the screen of the effect display device 70 (image display area 700) (in this example The second special pattern is omitted). This pending number display 770 is displayed at least during a period in which pending change is present but pending icon display 760 is not performed. In addition, the display priority of the pending number display 770 is high, and it is overlapped with the error display (error display when a door opening error (low importance error type) or magnet sensor error (high importance error type) occurs)). Also, it is assumed that the display is not affected by the execution of specific image processing (fade-out, darkening, etc.) in the symbol pseudo stop effect (that is, the pending number display 770 is not subject to specific image processing ). In the case of FIG. 74, after the start of the SP reach effect, the display area of the pending icon 760 is hidden or not displayed ( deleted). Therefore, instead of displaying the pending icon 760, a pending number display 770 is displayed. However, as described above, the pending number display 770 is always displayed regardless of whether the SP reach production is in progress, or is always displayed regardless of whether the decorative accessories 781 and 782 are in operation. Alternatively, it may be always displayed not only during the fluctuation of the special symbols but also during the stop of the special symbols.

Then, in FIG. 74(P), an image reminiscent of the victory of character A, who is an ally character, is displayed, and then in FIG. 74(Q), the main decorative pattern 710 stops in a big win mode ("777" in this example). By being displayed, the jackpot of the target variation is shown.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 74, the pachinko machine 1 can execute an effect pattern in which the look-ahead effect and the character effect are combined. In addition, in FIG. 74, only the case where the target suspension is a suspension related to a big hit is shown, but even if the result of the preliminary determination by the prefetch effect for the target suspension is a loss, the prefetch effect and the character effect are similarly performed. It is possible to execute a production that combines

In the production example of FIG. 74, the dialogue production appears during the execution period of the look-ahead production (FIGS. 74(B) to 74(K)), but the telop production appears after the look-ahead production ends (that is, the change). only appear. Note that the dialogue effect can be executed even after the look-ahead effect ends (that is, the variation). This is a control specification in which the SP reach effect is not executed in the fluctuation from the start of the look-ahead effect to the target change (or all the fluctuations until the target change does not develop into the SP reach effect) This is because the control specification allows the execution of the look-ahead effect only if , and the timing at which the dialogue effect or telop effect can appear is set before or after the timing when the SP reach effect develops into the SP reach effect. may be replaced with ). In this case, the dialogue production that can appear before the development of the SP reach production can appear even during the look-ahead production, if it is a specification that can appear even if it is a loss change. The telop effect will not appear during the look-ahead effect. That is, in the present embodiment, when character effects (telop effects, dialogue effects) and pre-reading effects are executed in combination, pre-reading effects (suggesting extremely high expectations at the time of appearance, limited to some pre-reading effects may be performed), the appearance of the dialogue effect is permitted, but the appearance of the telop effect is not permitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured to have the following features when character effects (telop effects, dialogue effects) and read-ahead effects are executed in combination.

First, it is possible to perform display by dialogue effects (especially dialogue display) in duplicate with pending icon display. good too. In order to have such a configuration, for example, during a period in which the dialogue effect can appear, such as before the development of the SP ready-to-win effect (during high-speed fluctuations, immediately after the ready-to-win effect is established, etc.), a pending icon is displayed (see FIG. 74 (E)) ) On the other hand, during the period in which the telop effect can appear, such as after the SP ready-to-win effect develops, the pending icon may be hidden (see FIG. 74(N)). Alternatively, the display area of the suspended icon and the display area of the telop effect may be set in different areas.

In addition, when executing the telop effect, instead of displaying the pending icon display, the pending number display 770 may be displayed to ensure the visibility of the pending number (Fig. 74 (N) reference).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only changes in character colors in character effects (dialogue effects, telop effects), but also expectations for game results or game developments, such as icon changes due to the above-described look-ahead effects, are determined. It is possible to execute various "notice display effects" suggested by the display mode. When the element (color, character, pattern, etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation in such an advance notice display effect is called an attribute, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes an advance notice display effect other than the character effect (for example, dialogue effect). The number of attribute types in (for example, icon change due to look-ahead effect) may be greater than the number of attribute types in character effect (for example, dialogue effect). Specifically, for example, the attribute types (character color of the character string) in the dialogue effect are limited to five types: white, blue, red, gold, and rainbow. A configuration is conceivable in which eight types of display colors are used: white, blue, yellow, green, red, purple, gold, and rainbow. It should be noted that, in the above description, the dialogue effect has been described, but it can be replaced with a telop effect, which is a text effect.

<6-5. Relationship with production mode>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of effect modes with different combinations of effects that can be executed may be prepared. Also, the plurality of types of presentation modes may be selectable by the player through a predetermined operation, or may be configured to automatically switch (transition) under predetermined conditions.

Here, the production mode will be explained. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of production modes, and which type of production can be executed is defined for each production mode. If you specifically explain the contents of the effects executed in the effect mode and the effect mode, for example, as a plurality of types of effect modes, a "normal mode" and a "rush mode" are set, and variations in the game state and special symbols One of a plurality of types of performance modes is set alternatively according to the number of times of display and the like, and a variable performance is executed according to the set performance mode. Basically, when the game state is the normal state (low base), the "normal mode" is set, and when the game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state (high base), the "rush mode" is set. . When one of the production modes is set, a background image dedicated to the production mode (main decorative pattern 710 and sub decorative pattern 720 background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Specifically, "Normal Mode" has four stages, "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage". With this as an opportunity, the transition from "stage A" to "stage B", transition from "stage B" to "stage C", transition from "stage C" to "stage A", and "pre-reading If you win the execution (transition) of the stage", move from the stage you are currently staying to the "read-ahead stage" (At the time of transition to the "read-ahead stage", the execution of the SP reach effect is confirmed, and if you hit the jackpot The main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in a big win mode in the "read-ahead stage", and when the result is a loss, the main decorative pattern 710 and the sub-decorative pattern 720 are displayed in a losing mode in the "read-ahead stage". , returns to the stage before transition to the "look-ahead stage" at the next change). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "look-ahead stage" (also different from the stage BGM of "rush mode"). The stage BGM is interrupted (finished) with the change stop (fixed stop) of the reach loss (the loss without forming the reach state, for example, "351", etc.), and the stage BGM is interrupted (finished) with the start of the next change. Starting from the beginning, in "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage", the stage BGM is not interrupted (not terminated) even if the non-reach loss fluctuation stops (fixed stop), The stage BGM is output continuously after the next variation (“Rush mode” is similarly configured to output continuously).

When the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of performance modes, the dialogue performance appears with different performance contents according to the performance mode, while the telop performance appears with the same performance contents regardless of the performance mode. may be configured to be Specifically, for example, in the dialogue production, the dialogue (character string) of the character corresponding to the production mode (for example, character A in production mode A, character B in production mode B) is displayed, while the telop In the production, the subtitles (character strings) of the character corresponding to the production are displayed without changing the character depending on the production mode (the subtitles of the character B are displayed even in the production mode A, and the characters that do not depend on the production modes A and B are displayed. C) may be used.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of performance modes, it may be configured with the following features (1) to (4).
(1) BGM (mode BGM) differs according to the production mode.
(2) In a predetermined production mode, the mode BGM is output (continued) even if the change is stopped/started. However, even in the predetermined production mode, the mode BGM is not output (interrupted) when the decorative symbols are changed again in the symbol pseudo-stop production.
(3) No mode BGM is output during the SP reach effect, and a dedicated BGM (SP reach BGM) corresponding to the SP reach effect is output.
(4) After the failure mode is shown in the SP ready-to-win production, when the symbol combination of the final stop pattern of the decorative symbols is displayed, neither the mode BGM nor the SP ready-to-win BGM is output, but the next fluctuation start is triggered. mode BGM is output from the beginning.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured to have features as described in detail below regarding the relationship between the effect mode and the symbol pseudo-stop effect.

In the following, as specific examples of the effect modes that the pachinko machine 1 can have, "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage" will be described. At this time, in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage", it is possible to execute the symbol pseudo stop effect, which will be described later. (When the "NEXT" symbol is temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the stage BGM starts from the beginning with a re-fluctuation (re-fluctuation after the temporary stop). Alternatively, it switches to a specific BGM that is different from before the re-change (specific BGM that suggests or notifies that the re-change is in progress). After that, when developing into SP reach production in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Looking ahead stage", from the background image of each stage (stage where you stayed) to the background image of SP reach production (At the same time, it switches to the BGM dedicated to the SP reach effect), the stage BGM is not output while the SP reach effect is being executed, and the SP reach effect is executed by displaying the effect indicating the failure in the SP reach effect. In the changed display, the background image of each stage is switched again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of the SP reach effect). Even if an image is displayed, the stage BGM is not output, nor is the BGM dedicated to the SP ready-to-win performance (a specific BGM that is silent or different from the BGM dedicated to the stage BGM and the BGM dedicated to the SP ready-to-win performance is output). Therefore, even if the non-reach-losing fluctuation stops (determined stop), the stage BGM is not interrupted (it does not end), and the stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation "Stage B", "Stage C ”, Even if it is a “look-ahead stage” (even if it is not “stage A”), if it is lost via SP reach production, the stage BGM will be performed before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is interrupted, and the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation.

In the "rush mode", the symbol pseudo-stop effect is not executed. Here, a predetermined suggestive effect that suggests that the symbol pseudo stop effect will be executed (for example, it is a dialogue effect, and the execution of the subsequent symbol pseudo stop effect is confirmed or the execution expectation is high "Continue!" It is suggested that the pattern pseudo stop effect (re-fluctuation) will be performed afterward by executing the effect such as "Continue?" is displayed only in "Stage A" and "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage in which the possibility of the simulated symbol stop effect being executed and a stage in which it is not possible to sense the possibility of execution of the symbol pseudo-stop effect in advance, and repeating the stage transition between the stages, the effect that does not make the player bored is created. Realized. In "stage A", a predetermined suggestive effect with character A as a motif is executed, but in "stage C", a predetermined suggestive effect with character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is an effect different from a predetermined suggestive effect, and a pseudo continuous confirmation effect that confirms that the symbol pseudo stop effect will be executed after just occurring (for example, when the character C appears, it always says "Continue confirmed!" A cut-in is displayed) is also provided, and furthermore, it is a different effect from a predetermined suggestive effect and a pseudo-consecutive confirmation effect, and after just occurring, the pattern pseudo-stop effect is not executed and develops into an SP reach effect. There is also provided a development confirmation effect (for example, an effect in which a cut-in saying "development is confirmed!" is displayed whenever the character D appears). This pseudo continuous fixed effect and development fixed effect can be executed in any of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage". In this way, when the simulated symbol stop effect is performed and when the simulated symbol stop effect is not performed, one or more of the predetermined suggestive effect, the simulated consecutive confirmation effect, and the development final effect are displayed in combination to display the simulated symbol stop effect. It is possible to diversify the execution expectation level of , and the development expectation level to the SP reach performance. It should be noted that during a single fluctuation display, all of the predetermined suggestive effect, pseudo-consecutive confirmation effect, and developmental confirmation effect may be executed. ) may include a pattern in which a predetermined suggestive effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo-consecutive fixed effect is executed, and a pattern in which a developmental fixed effect is executed. In the pattern in which a predetermined suggestive effect is executed in the first or second time of), even if a pseudo continuous confirmation effect is further executed during the certain re-fluctuation after the predetermined suggestive effect is executed during the re-fluctuation good.

<7. Derivation example of symbol pseudo stop effect>
In <6-2> described above, while referring to FIG. 72, an example of the simulated symbol stop effect that can be executed in combination with the character effect in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. First to fourth derivative patterns will be described for other symbol pseudo-stop effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment.

<7-1. First derivative pattern>
The first derivative pattern of the symbol pseudo-stop effect is configured with the following features (1) to (6).

(1) In the variation in which the development effect (for example, the SP reach effect) is displayed, the first notice effect is displayed during the re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern after the pattern pseudo-stop due to the symbol pseudo-stop effect (hereinafter simply referred to as re-fluctuation). When executed, it is certain that no further re-variation will be executed before display of the development effect. The first notice effect is, for example, a notice effect that occurs immediately before the development of the SP reach. This corresponds to a notice effect or the like in which a background image including a character string of "extreme heat" is displayed. Also, the telop effect is included in the third notice effect.

(2) In the variation in which the development effect is displayed, if the second notice effect is executed during the re-variation, a further re-variation may be executed before the display of the development effect. The second notice effect corresponds to, for example, a step-up notice, an operation request effect such as destroying an enemy in response to repeated pressing of the effect button, or an icon change effect of the change. In addition, the dialogue effect is also included in the second notice effect.

(3) In the variation in which the development effect is displayed, if the third advance notice effect is executed during the re-variation, it is certain that the further re-variation will be executed before the display of the development effect. The third notice effect corresponds to, for example, a predetermined notice effect suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-continuous change or a high degree of expectation for the development effect, and specifically, a dialogue effect that displays a character string such as "Continue!" , or an icon display notice such as the appearance of an icon with "NEXT" in the corner of the screen.

(4) During re-fluctuation within the same fluctuation, the first notice effect may be executed, and the second notice effect may be executed. Specifically, for example, during the pseudo-continuous variation after the second symbol pseudo-stop (third pseudo-continuous), "next notice" (first notice effect) may occur, step-up notice (second Notice production) may occur.

(5) It has an effect pattern in which the second notice effect is executed during the re-variation within the same change, and then the third notice effect is executed. Specifically, for example, a step-up notice (second notice effect) occurs in the second pseudo-continuation, and at some time after that (after the third pseudo-consecution), a display notice (third notice effect) of the "NEXT" icon ) may occur.

(6) After a predetermined number of simulated symbol stops, the case where further re-variation (pseudo-run) by the symbol-simulated stop effect is not executed is better than the case where the further re-variation (pseudo-run) is executed. There are many candidates for the effect that can be executed in the subsequent ready-to-win state. Specifically, for example, when the symbol pseudo-stop effect ends in the second pseudo-run, a weak ready-to-reach effect (normal reach effect) that is not selected when it continues to the third pseudo-run can be selected. . Also, for example, when the pseudo run ends at the third time, various SP reach effects can be selected, but when the upper limit of the pseudo run reaches the fourth time, only full rotation reach can be selected. .

<7-2. Second derivative pattern>
The second derived pattern of the symbol pseudo-stop effect is configured to have the following feature (7) in addition to the features (1) to (4) shown in the first derived pattern.

(7) In the same variation, when re-variation is executed after the fourth foretelling effect is executed, the same fourth foretelling effect is not executed again during the execution of the re-variation. The fourth notice effect, for example, is set to occur at an extremely low frequency and corresponds to a so-called premier notice effect that suggests an extremely high degree of expectation for the game result. , a stage change effect to a premier stage, a premier effect that does not appear multiple times during one change, and the like.

<7-3. Third derivative pattern>
The third derivative pattern of the symbol pseudo-stop effect is configured with the following features (8) to (10).

(8) The degree of expectation as to whether or not re-variation will be performed within the target variation depends on the effect content of the special effect (for example, the advance notice effect by the pre-reading effect) that is executed within the preceding change that is executed before the target change. Varies accordingly. Specifically, for example, in the preceding change, when the hold icon of the target hold is changed to a "red lighting display" different from the normal mode (for example, white lighting display) due to the hold icon change due to the look-ahead effect, the same hold Expectation of continuation of symbol pseudo-stop due to symbol pseudo-stop effect in target change (expectation that the number of pseudo consecutive times will increase) degree) can be high. It should be noted that the order of the degree of expectation of the pending icon is the order of white lighting display, white flashing display, and red lighting display. Also, for example, in the preceding variation, the “NEXT” icon is displayed in the icon display notice by the prefetch effect, rather than the “Reach?” icon is displayed in the same icon display notice. It can be said that the continuation expectation of the symbol pseudo stop by is high.

(9) Execution of a predetermined suggestive effect, which is executed in the target variation and suggests whether or not a re-variation is to be performed, is restricted until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined suggestive effect is, for example, an advance notice effect limited to a certain effect mode. !” signboard to suggest the degree of expectation for the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, or a symbol pseudo-stop effect using a dedicated symbol corresponding to the stage. Satisfying the predetermined condition corresponds to pressing the effect button, expiring the operation effective period of the effect button, or reaching a specified effect display time.

(10) It has a plurality of types of effect modes, and in a specific effect mode, re-variation can be executed, but the predetermined suggestive effect is not executed. For example, it means that the predetermined suggestive effect that can be executed in the effect mode B capable of executing the symbol pseudo stop effect is not executed in the effect mode A capable of executing the symbol pseudo stop effect.

<7-4. Fourth derivative pattern>
The fourth derivative pattern of the symbol pseudo-stop effect is configured with the following features (11) to (14).

(11) Depending on the content of the specific effect (for example, dialogue effect) in the target change when the look-ahead effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the re-variation of the symbol pseudo-stop effect in the target change (the number of pseudo consecutive times) is increased. different. For example, in the dialogue production, when the character string is displayed in a character color with a high degree of expectation, the degree of expectation for a large number of simulated symbol stops (pseudo-continuation) in the target variation can be increased. can.

(12) When a look-ahead effect is executed, a special effect in the preceding change of the target change (for example, a effect that can be stopped at a "chance eye" where the decorative symbols are aligned with a specific pattern, such as "123" or " Expectations for re-fluctuations in target fluctuations (the number of pseudo-runs) differ depending on the order (such as "456" and reverse order of symbols such as "321" and "654"). That is, when the chance number stops in the preceding variation, the degree of expectation for a large number of symbol pseudo stops (pseudo run) in the target variation is higher than when the chance number does not stop. be able to. In addition, when the chance number in the reverse order among the chance numbers stops in the preceding fluctuation, the number of pattern simulations in the target fluctuation is greater than when the chance number in the order among the chance numbers stops in the preceding fluctuation. It can be configured to increase the expectation of stopping (pseudo-continuation).

(13) In the target change, execution of a predetermined suggestive effect suggesting a re-change is restricted until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The above-mentioned predetermined suggestive effect, for example, requires the user to press the effect button during the symbol pseudo-stop effect, and with the press as a trigger, the display of "NEXT?" or "NEXT!" It corresponds to the operation request effect that is displayed. Satisfying the predetermined condition corresponds to pressing the effect button, expiring the operation effective period of the effect button, or reaching a specified effect display time.

(14) It has a plurality of types of effect modes, and in a specific effect mode, a predetermined suggestive effect suggesting re-variation is not executed.

Although the pachinko machine has been described as one embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine. In other words, gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as slot machines, gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine, and managed gaming machines that do not require game balls or game medals (enclosed gaming machines, medalless gaming machines) gaming machines), casino machines, etc., the present invention can be applied.

1: Pachinko machine 2: Outer frame 2a to 2d: Frame 2e, 2f: Hinge member 2p: Door opening sensor 3: Glass frame (door frame) 3a, 3b: Hinge mechanism 3c: Locking device 3d: through hole 3e: base unit 3f: dish unit 3g: area 3h: frame lamp (LED lamp) 3i: speaker 3j: effect button 3k: second effect button 4: front frame 4a : Handle 4b: Frame 4c, 4d: Hinge 4e: Launcher 4f: Locking unit 4g: Substrate unit 4h: Back cover 4i, 4j: Hinge member 4p: Door opening detection member 5 : game board 5a: game area 5b: main control unit 5c: peripheral control unit 8: upper ball plate 9: lower ball plate 10: performance lamp (frame lamp) 11: speaker 12: launch handle 13: Ball feed mechanism 14: Launch mechanism 15: Production button 20A: Game area 22: Center decoration 25: Production lamp (board lamp) 29: First out port 31: Storage tank 34 : prize ball payout unit 61: first starting port 62: second starting port 63: gate 64: big winning port 66: general winning port 70: liquid crystal display device 91: lamp connection board 92: Motor driver 100: Main control board 100a: Front member 100b: Game panel 100c: Function display unit 100d: Inner rail 100e: Out guideway 100f: Outer rail 100h: Opening 100m: Front unit 100n: main control board case 100p: harness cover 100q: setting key switch 101: main control CPU 101B: strobe signal output port 102: main control ROM 103: main control RAM 104: I/O port circuit 109: Production control board connection connector 110: Entering ball determination means 111: Data bus 112: Strobe signal bus 120: Game lottery random number generation means 123: Ordinary electric accessory solenoid 124: Special electric accessory solenoid 130: Reservation control means 131: Special symbol reservation control means 132: Normal symbol reservation control means 135: Advance determination means 140: Special symbol lottery processing means 141: Special symbol validity determination means 142: Special symbol stop Design determination means, 143: special design variation pattern determination means, 145: normal design Lottery processing means 146: Normal symbol validity determination means 147: Normal symbol stop symbol determination means 148: Normal symbol variation pattern determination means 150: Special game control means 155: Symbol display control means 156: Special symbol display control Means 157: Ordinary symbol display control means 160: Electric accessory control means 161: First starter switch 162: Second starter switch 163: Operation gate switch 164: Big winning prize switch 166: General Winning hole switch 167: Out ball detection switch 169: Game state control means 170: Error monitoring control means 171: First special symbol display device 172: Second special symbol display device 173: First special symbol reservation Lamp 174: Second special figure reservation lamp 175: Normal pattern display device 176: General figure reservation lamp 180: Main information storage means 190: Command transmission/reception means 195: Setting change means 196: Setting confirmation means 197: Setting display unit 200: Production control board 200a: Opening 200m: Back unit 201: Production control CPU 202: Production control ROM 203: Production control RAM 204: I/O port circuit 210: Production Lottery random number generation means 220: Production control means 221: Production mode control means 222: Reservation information display control means 223: Pre-reading notice control means 224: Decorative pattern determination means 225: Fluctuation production decision means 226: Notice Effect determination means 227: Jackpot effect determination means 230: Lamp effect control means 240: Character object effect control means 250: Error effect control means 260: Effect control information storage means 270: Command transmission/reception means 300: Image Control board 300m: Liquid crystal base 301: Image control CPU 302: VDP 303: Sound source IC 304: ROM 305: RAM 306: I/O port circuit 400: Payout control board 400p: RAM clear switch Cover 400q: RAM clear switch 401: Payout control CPU 402: Payout control ROM 403: Payout control RAM 500: Attacker unit 600: Power board 600p: Power switch cover 600q: Power switch 622: Normal Electric Accessory 642: Special Electric Accessory 700: Image Display Screen 710: Main Decorative Design (Decorative Design) 711: Left Design 712: Middle Drawing Pattern, 713: Right pattern, 720: Sub-decorative pattern, 750: The change icon, 760: Suspended icon, 761: First suspended icon, 762: Second suspended icon, 763: Third suspended icon, 764: Fourth suspended icon, 770: display of pending number, 781, 782: decoration accessories

Claims (1)

Win/lose is determined based on information obtained by establishment of a predetermined starting condition, special symbols are variably displayed based on the result of the determination, and when a specific display result is displayed as a result of the variative display. A gaming machine in which a special game advantageous to a player is performed,
a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Production control means for controlling the execution of production according to the progress of the game by the main control means;
a display device capable of displaying the effect;
a performance input device that allows input operations by a player;
with
The performance includes:
a first character effect in which a first character string is displayed on a predetermined display device at a predetermined timing during a predetermined game period;
a second character effect in which a second character string is displayed on the display device at a specific timing later than the predetermined timing in the predetermined game period;
an operation request effect for requesting the player to perform an input operation of the effect input device;
includes
The operation request effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns with different expectations for game results or game development,
During the same fluctuation of the special symbols, the operation request effect is more likely to be displayed when the second character effect is displayed than when the first character effect is displayed,
The operation request effect displayed after the second character effect is displayed during the same variation of the special symbol is the operation displayed after the first character effect is displayed during the same variation of the special symbol. A specific production pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is more likely to be selected than the requested production ,
A first error notification effect for displaying a first error character string, which is a notification character string related to the first error when a first error occurs, and a second error when a second error different from the first error occurs. a second error notification effect for displaying a second error character string, which is a notification character string related to the second error;
When the first error character string is displayed by executing the first error notification effect, the first error character string and the first character string in the first character effect are superimposed and displayed at the same time. While possible, the first error character string and the second character string in the second character rendering can be displayed simultaneously without overlapping,
When the second error character string is displayed by executing the second error notification effect, the second error character string is not displayed simultaneously with the first character string in the first character effect. , and the second character string in the second character rendering is not displayed at the same time,
When executing the first character rendering or the second character rendering, it is possible to accompany voice output corresponding to the characters related to the first character string or the second character string, and the first character Even if the first error notification effect is executed when the first character effect or the second character effect accompanied by the voice output corresponding to the characters related to the string or the second character string is executed, the first error notification effect is executed. It is possible to adjust the volume when outputting the voice corresponding to the first character string or the characters related to the second character string.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images